Koch-Lochner Music 2007

i
Music for Early Childhood: Guidelines for

Parents in the Western Cape
ALETTA MARIA KOCH-LOCHNER
Thesis presented in partial fulfilment of the requirements for the degree of

Master of Music in the Faculty of Arts, at the University of Stellenbosch
Stellenbosch Supervisor:
March 2007 Prof. M. Smit
ii
DECLARATION
I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the work contained in this thesis is my
own original work and that I have not previously in its entirety or in part
submitted it at any university for a degree.
Signature: ................................ Date: ..............................

iii
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Many thanks to my parents, Hennie and Annalize, and my husband, Mornè, for their
love, support and baby-sitting services.
DEDICATION
This thesis is dedicated to my son, Hendrik, whose birth on 23/06/2005 brought new
sense, meaning, purpose and fulfilment into my work and personal life.
iv
ABSTRACT
The research for this thesis is presented in the form of a practical guideline for parents and
educators in the Western Cape area. The important role of music in early childhood is
emphasised throughout. Research, guidance and practical activities for the music education
and development of the toddler and preschooler, are presented. The author answers and
discusses the questions frequently asked by parents concerning musical education for their
children, namely why, when and how, in the five chapters of the thesis. The importance of
music education for children (the question concerning why) is discussed and emphasised by
means of eleven different reasons supported by research.
In Chapter 2, the important role of the parent as the child’s first music educator and prenatal
stimulation is discussed (the question concerning when).
In the two chapters that follow, the author provides parents with information about basic music
concepts and skills that children should be able to master at specific ages. Throughout these
chapters, practical activities to illustrate these concepts and to practise the relevant skills are
suggested (the how question). Guidelines are presented concerning how play with the child
should be approached and handled, as well as guidelines for the child’s first formal
instrumental teaching and for choosing an instrument and a music teacher.
The research is concluded with a practical section containing extensive lists of songs (in
categories), CDs, DVDs, books and web addresses for the use of parents needing resources
and further guidance.
v
OPSOMMING
Die navorsing vir hierdie tesis word in die vorm van ‘n praktiese handleiding vir ouers en
opvoeders in die Wes-Kaap provinsie aangebied. Die belangrike rol van musiek in die
voorskoolse kind se lewe word deurgaans beklemtoon. Navorsing, riglyne en praktiese
aktiwiteite vir die musiekopvoeding en ontwikkeling van die voorskoolse kindword, word
prakties aangebied en bespreek.Die outeur beantwoord en bespreek die vernaamste vrae wat
ouers ten opsigte van musiekopvoeding vir hul kinders vra, naamlik hoekom, wanneer en hoe,
in die vyf hoofstukke van die tesis. Die belangrikheid van musiekopvoeding vir kinders (die
hoekom vraag) word aan die hand van elf verskillende redes en wat deur navorsing
ondersteun word, bespreek. Die belangrike rol van die ouer as eerste musiekopvoeder en
prenatale stimulasie word in Hoofstuk 2 bespreek (die vraag aangaande wanneer).
In die twee daaropvolgende hoofstukke bied die outeur verdere inligting aan ouers oor
basiese musiekkonsepte en vaardighede wat kinders op sekere ouderdomme moet kan
bemeester. Praktiese aktiwiteite om hierdie konsepte te illustreer en die verlangde
vaardighede te oefen (die hoe vraag) word deurgaans voorgestel. Riglyne word gegee oor
hoe spel met die kind benader en hanteer moet word, asook riglyne vir die kind se eerste
formele instrumentale onderrig, die keuse van ‘n instrument en van ‘n musiekonderwyser.
Die navorsing word afgesluit met ‘n praktiese afdeling waarin uitgebreide lyste van liedjies
(volgens verskillende kategorieë), beskikbare CD-opnames, DVD-opnames, boeke en
webadresse vir ouers gegee word as bronne en as verdere riglyne.
CONTENTS
vi
CHAPTER 1: Introduction 01
1.1 Problem statement 01
1.2 Aim of the study 02
1.3 Organisation of the study 03
CHAPTER 2: The Importance of Music Education for Children

(Question: Why should parents provide music education for their children?)
2.1 Music for the sake of music as primary goal 08
2.2 Music is part of the human world 08
2.3 Music is part human heritage 09
2.4 The Biological foundations of music 09
2.5 Music can contribute to the cognitive development of the child 11
2.6 Music can contribute to the physical development of the child 15
• Gross motor control skills 16
• Fine motor control skills 16
• Balance skills 16
• Eye-hand co-ordination skills 16
• Eye-foot co-ordination skills 16
• Laterality skills 16
2.7 Music can contribute to the emotional development of the child 16
2.8 Music can contribute to the social development of the child 18
• Group participation and socially appropriate behaviours 19
• Improved communication skills 19
• Leadership 19
• Awareness of cultural and national identity 20
2.9 Musical Intelligence: One of the intelligences according to Howard Gardner’s Theory of
Multiple intelligences 20
2.10 Music can be of therapeutic value to the child 24
2.10.1 The therapeutic characteristics of music 25
2.10.2 The long-term goals of music therapy 26
2.10.3 Activities used in music therapy 27
2.11 Music provides a means for personal expression, as well as pleasure and joy 28
2.12 Conclusion 29
CHAPTER 3: When to start music education with the child 30

vii
(Question: When should the parent begin their child’s music education?)
3.1 Prenatal research 30
3.1.1 The sound environment of the womb 30
3.1.2 Development and maturation of the Fetal Auditory System 31
3.1.3 Research on the influence of sound and learning in utero 33
3.2 The child’s first introduction to music 36
3.2.1 The role of the parents 36
3.2.2 Practical Prenatal stimulation exercises 39
3.3 Conclusion 39
CHAPTER 4: Guidelines and information to help parents to make a positive

contribution to the child’s early musical development and music education
(Question: What information and guidelines can the parent use in order
to make a positive contribution to the child’s early musical education?) 40
4.1 Musical development and experiences in early childhood 40
4.1.1 Musical development and experiences of the infant phase
(birth to twelve months) 40
4.1.1.1 General development and characteristics of the infant phase 40
4.1.1.2 The development of auditory perception in the infant phase 43
4.1.1.3 The first musical experiences of the infant 50
4.1.1.4 Active responses from the infant to musical stimuli 50
4.1.1.4 (i) General responses to musical stimuli 50
4.1.1.4 (ii) Earliest movements to musical stimuli 51
4.1.1.4 (iii) Earliest vocalising and musical babbling 52
(a) Vocalisation 53
(b) Musical Babbling 54
4.1.1.4 (iv) Musical memory and the Infant 55
4.1.1.5 Activities and musical experiences for the infant phase 56
4.1.2 Musical development and experiences in the first half of the toddler
phase (twelve to twenty four months) 61
4.1.2.1 General development and characteristics of the early toddler phase 61
4.1.2.2 Active responses by the early toddler to musical stimuli 62
4.1.2.2 (i) General responses to musical stimuli 62
4.1.2.2 (ii) Movements made by the early toddler to musical stimuli 63
(a) Types of movements 63
(b) Co-ordination of music and movement 64
4.1.2.2 (iii) Singing characteristics of the early toddler 64
(a) Babbling songs 65
(b) Songs imitating a sung model (“imitating songs”) 65
4.1.2.2 (iv) Musical memory and the early toddler 67
4.1.2.3 Activities for the first half of the toddler phase 67
viii
4.1.3 Musical development and experiences in the second half of the toddler
phase (two to three years) 67
4.1.3.1 General development in and characteristics of the
second half of the toddler phase 67
4.1.3.2 The later toddler’s active responses to musical stimuli 68
4.1.3.2 (i) The later toddler’s movements made in response to musical stimuli 68
4.1.3.2 (ii) The singing characteristics of the later toddler 69
(a) Types of songs sung by the later toddler 70
• Spontaneous and imaginative singing 70
• Pre-learnt songs 70
• Mixed form or “Pot-Pourri” songs 71
(b) Singing skills of the two-year-old toddler 71
4.1.3.2 (iii) Activities and musical experiences for the second half of the toddler
phase 71
4.1.4 Musical development and experiences in the preschool phase 73
(three to four years)
4.1.4.1 General development in and characteristics of the preschool phase 74
4.1.4.2. Active responses to musical stimuli in the preschool phase 74
4.1.4.2 (i) Movements made by the preschooler to musical stimuli 75
4.1.4.2 (ii) Singing and the preschooler 75
(a) Spontaneous and imaginative singing 76
(b) Pre-learnt songs and the singing skills of the
three-year-old 76
4.1.4.3 Observable musical behaviours of the three-year-old preschooler 77
4.1.4.4 Activities for this phase 78
4.1.5 Musical development and experiences of the preschool child 78
(four to six years)
4.1.5.1 General development and characteristics of the preschool phase 78
4.1.5.2 Movements and the preschooler 79
4.1.5.3 Singing and the preschooler 80
4.1.5.4 Activities and music experiences for this phase 81
4.2 The structural elements of music 83
4.2.1 Timbre 84
4.2.2 Dynamics 86
4.2.3 Tempo 87
4.2.4 Rhythm 89
4.2.5 Melody 92
4.2.6 Form 94
4.2.7 Texture and Harmony 96
4.3 The child and musical play 98
4.3.1Types of social play modes 98
• Solitary play 99
• Onlooker play 99
ix
• Parallel Play
99
• Associative play 99
• Co-operative play 99
• Functional play 100
• Constructive play 100
• Dramatic play 100
• Games with rules 100
4.3.2 Musical Play 100
• Cooperative Musical play 100
• Functional Musical play 101
• Constructive Musical play 101
• Dramatic Musical play 101
• Kinaesthetic Musical play 101
• Games with rules 101
4.3.3 Importance of musical play 101
4.3.4 How do children play at different ages and different developmental
phases? 103
4.3.4.1 Musical play and the two-year-old toddler 103
4.3.4.2 Musical play and the three-year-old toddler 104
4.3.4.3 Musical play and the four-year-old preschooler 105
4.3.4.4 Musical play and the five-year-old preschooler 106
4.3.4.5 Musical play and the six-year-old preschooler 107
4.3.5 Suggestions for parents and educators joining children in playing 108
4.3.6 The Importance of communicating with the child 108
4.4 Conclusion 109
CHAPTER 5: Music education and music experience in early childhood: basic

skills and activities to develop these skills 110
(Question: How should the parent present music education and music
experiences in early childhood?)
5.1 Basic skills that ought to be developed in every child 110
5.1.1 Listening skills 110
5.1.1.1 Auditory awareness 110
5.1.1.2 Auditory discrimination 111
5.1.1.3 Auditory memory and sequencing 113
5.1.2 Singing skills 116
5.1.2.1 The Importance and function of singing for the preschool child 116
5.1.2.2 Guidelines to use when selecting children’s songs for young children
117
5.1.2.3 Afrikaans folk songs for preschoolers between the ages of five and
seven 119
x
5.1.2.4 Guidelines and activities for parents in helping children with the
development of their singing skills 121
(i)The child’s own improvised songs 121
(ii)The child singing the structured songs of others 126
5.1.3 Rhythmic bodily movements 127
5.1.3.1 The sequential development of movement in early childhood and
practical activities 129
(Question: How should movement activities be presented to the child?)
• Expressive movement centred on the self 129
• Imagery in movement 129
• Transition to patterned movement 130
• Responding to the underlying beat 130
• Movement in relation to the underlying beat 130
• Dance 130
5.1.3.2 Basic movements that the preschool child should be able to identify
and perform 130
5.1.3.2 (i) Nonlocomotor movements (in place) 130
5.1.3.2 (ii) Locomotor movements (across space) 131
5.1.3.2 (iii) Other movement concepts and variations 134
5.1.3.3 Practical Movement Activities 138
5.1.3.3 (i) Important aspects to consider when presenting movement
activities 138
5.1.3.3 (ii) Movement activities centred on the self 139
5.1.3.3 (iii) Movement activities based on the use of imagery 139
5.1.3.3 (iv) Movement activities based on the transition to patterned
movement 140
5.1.3.3 (v) Movement activities based on responses to an underlying beat
141
5.1.3.3 (vi) Movement activities in relation to the underlying beat 141
5.1.3.3 (vii) Movement activities based on dance 143
5.1.3.3 (viii) Body percussion 144
5.1.3.3 (ix) Rhythmic speech patterns 145
5.1.3.3 (x) Action songs and dances 145
5.1.3.3 (xi) Free and creative movements 146
5.1.4 Instrumental play 146
5.1.4.1 Informal introduction and activities for instrumental play 146
5.1.4.2 Formal instrumental teaching 148
5.1.4.2 (i) When should your child start formal music lessons? 148
5.1.4.2 (ii) Which attributes should a good early childhood 149
5.1.4.2 (iii) The role of the parent in daily practicing 151
5.1.4.2 (iv) Choosing the correct instrument for the child 154
xi
5.1.5 Criteria used by the author for selecting music and other resources for
Addendum A and Addendum B
156
5.2 Conclusion 158
CHAPTER 6: Summary of research 160
BIBLIOGRAPHY 162
ADDENDUM A
Resources available for early childhood music education and music experiences
169
A.1 Compact disk catalogue 169
A.1.1 Specific Instruments, music eras, composers and other mixed compilations 170
A.1.2.Suitable recordings of ballets, dances and marches that encourage
imaginative listening and dramatisation in children 171
1. Suitable recordings: Ballets 171
2. Suitable recordings: Marches 171
3. Suitable recordings: Dances 172
4. Suitable recordings for quiet listening 172
5. Suitable recordings of music stories and other additional listening 172
A.1.3 Other individual compositions with a specific instrument or combination of
instruments 173
A.1.3.1 Stringed instruments 173
A.1.3.2 The Plucked instruments 174
A.1.3.3 The Woodwind instruments 174
A.1.3.4 The Brass instruments 176
A.1.3.5 The Percussion instruments 177
A.1.3.6 The Keyboard instruments 178
A.1.4 Twentieth Century Popular Instrumental Music for Preschoolers 178
A.1.4.1 Mixed Classical Compilations 178
A.1.4.2 Popular South African instrumental and vocal music 180
A.1.4.3 Traditional South African instrumental and vocal music 180
A.1.4.4 Music stories 181
A.1.4.5 Music for imaginative listening 181
A.1.5 Twentieth century popular vocal music for preschoolers 182
A.1.5.1 Afrikaans 182
A.1.5.2 English 183
A.1.6 Popular gospel music for children 183
A.1.7 Lullabies 184
A.1.7.1 Instrumental 184
A.1.7.2 Vocal 185
A.1.8 Sounds from nature and peaceful atmospheric music 185
A.2 Books 186
xii
A.3 Films and DVDs
186
A.3.1 Old classics 186
A.3.2 Animation favourites and educational DVDs. 187
A.4 Web sites 187
A.4.1 Web resources for early childhood music education 187
A.4.2 Electronic dictionaries and encyclopedias of music 188
A.4.3 Internet practice-and-drill sites for music learning 189
A.4.4 Virtual learning centres 189
A.5 Computer programmes 190
ADDENDUM B:
Song repertoire for the preschool child 192
B.1 English songs 192
B.1.1 Songs based on Nursery Rhymes and Mother Goose Songs 192
B.1.2 English Action Songs and Games 194
B.1.3 English finger-play rhymes and chants 195
B.1.4 Finger-play songs 195
B.1.5 Rhymes, chants and rhythmic speech patterns 196
B.1.6 Counting and counting-out songs 196
B.1.7 Greeting songs 196
B.1.8 Singing games 196
B.1.9 Action songs, circle singing games and songs in formation 197
B.1.10 Songs in formation 197
B.1.11 Examples of three tone songs 198
B.1.12 Call and response songs 198
B.1.13 Songs for the young child 198
B.1.14 Songs illustrating musical elements 198
B.1.15 Occasional songs 198
B.1.16 Songs about themselves 199
B.1.17 Singing while playing and performing specific actions 199
B.1.18 Songs about the home and daily routines 200
B.1.19 Songs about babies 200
B.1.20 Foot-riding songs 201
B.1.21 Songs about bedtime 201
B.1.22 Prayer songs 201
B.1.23 Songs about the sun, moon and stars 201
B.1.24 Songs about seasons and the weather 202
B.1.25 Pets and other animals 202
B.2 Afrikaans folk songs 203
B.2.1 Afrikaans folksongs 203
B.2.2 Afrikaans action songs and games 203
B.2.3 Afrikaans rhymes, chants, bouncing rhymes and rhythmic speech patterns 205
B.2.4 Afrikaans Finger-play songs 206
B.2.5 Afrikaans Rhymes, chants and rhythmic speech patterns 206
B.2.6 Afrikaans counting and counting-out songs 206
B.2.7 Afrikaans Singing games 206
xiii
B.2.8 Afrikaans songs in formation
207
B.2.9 Examples of Afrikaans three tone songs 207
B.2.10 Afrikaans call and response songs 207
B.2.11 Afrikaans songs for the young child 207
B.2.12 Afrikaans Occasional songs 209
B.2.13 Afrikaans songs about themselves 209
B.2.15 Afrikaans songs about the home and daily routines 210
B.2.16 Afrikaans songs about babies 210
B.2.17 Afrikaans footriding songs 210
B.2.18 Afrikaans songs about seasons and the weather 210
B.2.20 Afrikaans songs for bedtime and lullabies 212
B.3 Xhosa songs 213
B.3.1 Xhosa action songs and games 213
B.3.2 Xhosa greeting songs 214
B.3.3 Xhosa singing games 214
B.3.4 Xhosa songs in formation 214
B.3.5 Xhosa call and response songs 214
B.3.6 Xhosa songs about themselves 214
B.3.8 Xhosa songs about the home and daily routines 214
B.3.9 Xhosa lullabies and songs about bedtime 215
B.3.10 Xhosa prayer songs 215
B.3.11 Xhosa songs about seasons and the weather 215
1
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
1.1 Problem statement
The writer’s research over the past two years has identified several needs in the field of Music
Education in Early Childhood (0-seven years).
• A wide variety of literature and material on music education for early childhood is
available in libraries, overseas bookshops and through the Internet, but the problem
with this is that most of the available material is written and published solely for use by
music educators.
• The books and material can furthermore only be read, understood and implemented by
a reader who is able to read music notation fluently and has received formal music
training.
• Music Education in South African schools has recently been replaced by the new Arts
and Culture Learning Area in the new Curriculum 2005 programme. Several problems
involving financial shortages, a limited budget, a shortage of teachers qualified in music
as well as in other subject areas, have led to the replacement of music education with
the new curriculum 2005 programme. Another reason could possibly be ignorance
about the importance of Music Education for early childhood development.
• From a more positive and entrepreneurial point of view, the above mentioned events
have had a positive effect on our country and education system. For the first time the
onus and responsibility to supply a rich, stimulating musical environment and music
education for the child is not solely the teacher’s responsibility anymore. Parents are
becoming actively involved in their children’s music education. Every parent ought to
be the child’s first music teacher, so that, when the child starts formal music training,
the basic foundation has already been laid.
• Currently, music stimulation programmes such as Kindermusik and PRACTICA are

being presented all over South Africa. Most of these programmes comprise foreign
models based on foreign music material. These programmes can be purchased as a
franchise by any interested person. In some of these programmes, music is merely
used as a medium to develop basic skills in children, such as co-ordination, crossing
2
over the middle line, etc., therefore music is used as a resource to develop and
achieve other goals. Some individuals have taken the initiative to design their own
music programmes for children. Unfortunately these programmes are not readily
available or marketed to the wider public.
• The problem that was researched involved investigating and drawing up a marketable
and readily available musical programme to be used by parents as a guideline for their
child’s musical experiences and development.
1.2 Aim of the study
The research objectives comprised:
• Investigating the child’s musical developmental stages. The main objectives involved (i)
describing the full musical development of the young child in early childhood and (ii)
investigating ways to expose young children to all the music concepts and letting them
experience all these concepts through a range of activities.
• Through this thesis the writer wants to create awareness and inform parents of the
importance of music education for their children. The aim is to supply the parent and
child with enjoyable music activities that will create awareness of and pride in a rich folk
music heritage. In South Africa there are eleven official national languages. The author
of this thesis has been living in the Western Cape area for more than twenty-six years
and teaching music for thirteen years in three of the official languages (Afrikaans,
English and Xhosa). Xhosa is spoken in this area as an African language, therefore the
other eight languages are excluded. The focus basically will be on children from a
western cultural background in the Western Cape region, which also includes children
from historically disadvantaged communities.
The practical objectives were:
• To set guidelines that can be read, understood, implemented and used by parents,
even those who have no formal music training or are not able to read any music
notation. These guidelines can also be used by teachers in crèches and play schools
who want to present a music programme for their toddlers and preschoolers.
3
• Parents usually have standard questions when it concerns their child’s music
education. In this thesis, the writer aims to answer these questions in the different
chapters and divisions. Every heading is based on a frequently asked question.
• A list of other resources such as a Compact Disk Catalogue, books, web sites and CD
Rom programmes is included in this thesis. Lists of songs and references to sheet
music for the South African child are also supplied.
• The author plans to use this study and adapt it for later publication in a more popular
and informal format. The aim is to develop a publication with practical examples of
activities to be marketed to parents, teachers and preschools.
The research methodology used was:

• The author investigated and searched the Internet from the year 2000 to find new
scientific research about music education and to examine and investigate the new
direction that music research was taking.
• The author attended two world conferences to gather more information and insight into
the area of neuroscience and music research. The first conference was presented by
the New York Academy of Sciences in 2000 in New York and was mainly about the
biological foundations of music. The second conference called “The Neurosciences
and Music” was held in Venice in 2002, by the New York Academy of Sciences. The
author attended the conference after receiving a full scholarship and presented a
poster on “How and why a young South African musician/ music educator uses music
to improve and develop physical skills in teaching children 18 months to five years of
age”.
• The author used extensive resources from the library of the University of Stellenbosch
and also combined her own experiences, practical ideas and activities from the last
thirteen years of teaching music to more than 1500 children.
1.3 Organisation of the study
In Chapter 2, the Importance of Music Education for Children is discussed and the question of
why parents should provide music education for their children will be answered. Eleven
4
reasons or categories motivating why music should be taught to all young children are
presented. The effect of music on the cognitive, physical, emotional and social development of
the child is investigated and music as an intelligence is discussed. The biological foundations
for music, as well as its therapeutic characteristics, are examined.
Jean Piaget’s theory on cognitive development is well known and he basically divided the
child’s cognitive development into four phases. These phases are:
• Sensorimotor phase (from birth up to the age of two years)
• Preoperational phase (from the age of two years to seven years)
• Concrete operations phase (from the age of seven to eleven years)
• Formal operations phase (from the age of eleven years onwards)(Louw, Gerdes &
Meyer, 1985:140).
For the purpose of this thesis the first two stages are of importance. During the sensorimotor
phase (from birth up to the age of two years) infants use their senses and motor skills to help
them understand the world around them. Their first motor skills initially starts with reflexes and
this stage ends with combinations of their sensomotor skills. According to Piaget infants aged
18 months are able to have mental representations of images. This skill enables them to hold
and remember an image in their minds for a period of time beyond their instant experience.
Infants are furthermore able to solve problems by using mental combinations. They will for
example put a toy down in order to open a door (Boeree [s.a.] [Online]).
During the preoperational phase (from the age of two years to seven years) toddlers are able
to have mental representations of images and are able to pretend and use their imagination.
According to Piaget this enables children to start using symbols. Children’s creative play is
seen by him as good example where children play creatively and where they are manipulating
symbols. An example of such creative play and manipulation is when children pretend to have
a tea party and where objects such as a box becomes table, paper becomes a plate and
seedpods becomes cookies. Children in this phase are able to understand and distinguish
between the past and future and they are still very egocentric (Boeree [s.a.] [Online]).
Certain aspects of Piaget ‘s theory attributed to more sensible curriculum planning. Important
aspects for cognitive development and music education in early childhood are: that children
5
should explore and discover music through active participation; that before any new
information or learning material are presented to children, they should first be assessed to see
whether they are ready for this new level of information; that the invironment that children
learn in should be structured and enriched; that learning and communication can only
successfully occur if children acquire the correct language and terminology to help them
verbalise and that the importance of play should always be emphasised (Grobler, 1986: 21).
According to Sonnekus (1976: 111-134) the criticism against Piaget’s theory is that he
describes children and their development in isolation and that he did not use the reality and
influences of education as starting point for his research. Piaget furthermore tends to view the
child from a more biological point of view and his classification of the child’s cognitive
development reflects his naturalistic perspective. Other criticism against Piaget is that he
placed a lot of emphasis on the cognitive development of the child and did not give enough
attention to the child’s emotional and social development and the essential role that these
factors play in the child’s overall development. Frost and Kissinger 1 criticism against Piaget’s
research is that his research focus mostly on descriptions and definitions of children’s
cognitive development and that he lacks to give practical advice on how to apply his research
and theory practically in primary schools (Grobler, 1986: 21).
Chapter 3 deals with music education for the preschool child and the question of when music
education should be started. Today the education for the toddler and preschool child is
referred to as Early Childhood Development (ECD). Early childhood is considered to include
children from one to six years of age. ECD can be divided into two sections, namely toddlers
who range from to age of one to three years, and preschoolers, who range between the ages
of three to six years of age. Early childhood is characterised by a lot of activity and discovery.
During early childhood development the personality and physical aspects of children develop
considerably. The purpose of ECD is to help children acquire language, to help them with their
social relationships and to assist them in learning more about role standards. ECD helps and
assists children to increase their self-control, their successful mastery of skills, as well as
increasing children’s’ awareness and knowledge of dependence and independence (Whaley &
Wong, 1987: 99).
1 Frost, J.L. & Kissinger, R.B. 1976. The young child and the educative process. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
6
According to the positions statement made by the Music Educator’s National Conference
(MENC), Early Childhood Education and Early Childhood programmes have many forms and
settings in America. MENC however stresses the importance of music as an integral part of all
such programmes. According to MENC music serves and helps children with the expressive,
emotional, cognitive, social and creative needs and desires of children. During ECD the
curriculum presented to young children should include several opportunities for children to
explore and discover sound through activities such as: singing, moving, listening and
instrumental play (MENC, 1992 [online]).
In section 3.1, prenatal research is examined and the child's first introduction to music, the
important role that parents play as "first music teachers" and practical stimulation exercises
are discussed in section 3.2.
Chapter 4, section 4.1 contains guidelines and information that can help parents to make a
positive contribution to the early development and music education of a child. Each
developmental stage from birth to seven years is discussed and practical activities are
suggested for each stage of development.
In section 4.2, the structural elements of music are examined and practical activities are
suggested to illustrate each element.
In section 4.3, the importance of and types of musical play are discussed, as well as how
children play at different developmental phases. Suggestions are given for when parents and
educators join children in play.
In Chapter 5, the four basic music skills (listening, singing, rhythmical body movement and
instrumental play) that ought to be developed are discussed and practical activities to develop
these skills are suggested.
Chapter 6 provides a brief summary of the research that was undertaken.
The research report is concluded with the Bibliography.
Addendum A lists resources that are available for Early Childhood Music Education and
Music Experiences. Lists of available and suitable CDs, DVDs, films, books, websites and
computer programs are also given.
7
Addendum B contains a song repertoire for the Preschool Child. In this chapter, Afrikaans,
English and Xhosa songs are listed in different categories and according to themes and types
of songs.
8
CHAPTER 2: THE IMPORTANCE OF MUSIC EDUCATION FOR CHILDREN
(Question: Why should parents provide music education for their children?)
In this chapter, the different reasons why parents should provide their children with music
education are discussed in eleven separate sections. Research undertaken by scientists and
educators to support the importance of music education and the important role that music can
play in the growth and development of children are discussed.
2.1 Music for the sake of music as primary goal
Though the next ten sections will discuss different reasons why music and music education
should play an important role in the holistic development of the child, it also remains important
to never lose sight of the aesthetic and intrinsic value that music has.
The functional goals of music should never be so stressed that the natural joy
and content of music are forgotten (Nye, 1979: 107).
We do not teach music because we expect you to major in music or become a

professional musician. Nor do we teach music because we expect you to play or
sing all your life (although you might). We teach music so you will recognise
beauty. We teach music so you will have more compassion. We teach music so
you can be fully human (Music makes you smarter: Why We Teach Music [s.a.]
[online]).
Music on its own has beauty and worth and that alone should be good enough reason to
expose children to music and to let them experience the beauty and aesthetic value of music.
2.2 Music is part of the human world
One of the functions of education is to introduce children to the environment that surrounds
them and familiarise them with it. Researchers and educators consider music as an essential
9
part of this environment and human life has always been guided, expressed and expanded by
music.
Music has always been used, no matter how primitive or sophisticated human culture might
be, as the essence in ritual and every important event in human life have always been
accompanied by some kind of musical display or expression (Bergethon et al., 1986: 3).
2.3 Music is part of human heritage
The history of music is considered to be the history of humanity. Throughout the history of
human development, as well as human desire and attempts for a better and prosperous life,
music has always been finely integrated in human life. Music is regarded as actual accounts
of how human beings have responded to struggles in their environment, as well as records of
important and treasured events in human lives. The musical heritage of human beings can be
experienced through these recorded songs and music (Bergethon et al., 1986: 3).
Music is furthermore seen as a reflection of the environment and the time of its creation, as
well as a reflection of cultural and social values (Music makes you smarter: Why We Teach
Music [s.a.] [online]).
2.4 The biological foundations of music
Blacking (1973) 2 makes the assumption that music, in addition to religion and language, is
one of the aspects that make human beings unique and different above all other species.
According to Blacking, musical tradition would not have been able to continue to exist and
survive if the majority of humankind was not musical (Szabo, 1999: 17).
According to Dr Robert Zatorre, head of the Montreal Neurological Institute and organiser of
the New York Academy of Sciences Conference, “The Biological Foundations of Music”, in
New York, music is part of all human cultures, as well as part of each individual’s life, from
birth to death (New York Academy of Sciences Magazine: March /April 2000 [online]).
2 Blacking, J. 1973. How musical is man? London: Faber & Faber

10
Zatorre furthermore believes that all human beings possess a type of intrinsic inclination to
create and produce music. He was quoted in the New York Academy of Sciences Magazine
saying that children at very young age are able to perform complex musical things without
having any formal musical training or instruction and that this intrinsic ability is often ignored
by adults because it seems to be such a simple and uncomplicated ability. He furthermore
stated that, although there are still several aspects of the brain and its functioning that are not
understood by neurologists and researchers, they do know that the uniqueness of the human
brain can be studied by examining the specific brain functions that differentiate human beings
from other species. The ability that humans have to talk to one another and to create and play
music involves two characteristics that distinguish us from any other species on earth (New
York Academy of Sciences Magazine: March /April 2000 [online]).
A relatively new type of scientific research is currently done by neuroscientists. Researchers

are currently studying how music is processed in the brain. The examination of the biological
foundations of music provides scientists with the opportunity to understand the complex and
entangled network of human cognition and brain functioning.
According to scientists, music has numerous characteristics that make it an ideal medium for
learning more about the brain. Aspects such as tone, pitch, rhythm and contour in music are
discrete and manipulable and allow scientists to perform detailed, precise and well-controlled
studies on how these different aspects are represented in the brain.
Geoffrey Collier, as quoted by the New York Academy of Sciences (New York Academy of
Sciences Magazine: March /April 2000 [online]), stated that it is of importance that scientists
studying and developing new theories on brain processing of auditory information use another
medium than just language upon which to base their research. Music is a perfect medium for
research since music can be auditively experienced, just like language, but has no discrete
defined contents in terms of meaning. This quality of music being auditive without being
semantic makes it ideal for research. Collier furthermore considers music to be very
mathematical in the sense that researchers are able to be precise in their set up of musical
experiments, that they are able to control various aspects in the exact manner that they want
to and that the results of these experiments can clearly be seen in the different areas of the
brain.
11
Alvaro Pascual-Leone (as quoted by New York Academy of Sciences (New York Academy of
Sciences Magazine: March /April 2000 [online]) a professor and researcher at Harvard
Medical School, stated that the most important characteristic of music, which makes it ideal
for brain research, is the fact that music involves the entire range of human behaviour and
that it is possible to research and examine processes ranging from simple mechanics to very
complex emotionally loaded artistic expression through music.
Isabelle Peretz, Professor at the University of Montreal, has done extensive research to
determine the evolutionary roots of music by examining and seeking special circuitry in the
brain assigned specifically to music. Peretz has the theory that, if a specific circuitry for music
exists in the brain, it is possible that music is an evolutionary adaptation. If not, then music
would likely be considered a cultural artefact.
If we can’t find any specialisation in the brain, then music is probably not responding to
biological needs. However, if the brain is specialised for music, then neuro-psychology
should provide evidence that musical abilities have functional and neuro-anatomical
autonomy from the rest of cognitive system. Isabelle Peretz, as quoted by New York
Academy of Sciences (New York Academy of Sciences Magazine: March /April 2000
[online]).
Peretz‘s extensive research with brain-damaged patients suggests that these special music
circuits do exist in the brain. Her research has shown how patients with severe deficits in
normal cognitive function, show selective sparing of musical abilities. These patients often are
not able to function normally cognitively, but are able to perform and exhibit certain abilities
with regard to music (New York Academy of Sciences Magazine: March /April 2000 [online]).
2.5 Music can contribute to the cognitive development of the child
Fascinating research has recently been conducted in the area of music and brain plasticity.
Traditionally, the brain was considered as being hard-wired and unable to change or
counteract in response to behaviour, external stimuli or deficits. Brain plasticity, on the
contrary, comprises the remodelling of brain circuitry in relation to different stimuli.
12
According to Robert Zatorre, Professor at McGill University, music is the perfect medium to
study brain plasticity, since scientists can study musicians who are highly trained and people
who are not. They, furthermore, can study the effect of training in either adults or children and
see, with the help of modern technology such as MRI scans, how the brain adapts to perform
these functions and how learning to play an instrument might cause modifications and
adaptations in the brain (New York Academy of Sciences Magazine: March /April 2000
[online]).
According to Gottfried Schlaug of Harvard Medical School, much is still unknown about
plasticity and how exactly the brain does its remodelling. He says that, although they do not
understand all the fundamental rules or theories about brain plasticity, they do think that
factors such as strengthening synapses that already exist, creating new brain synapses and
using unrelated brain tissue or neural circuits that have never been used for a task, could all
add to the brain’s plasticity (New York Academy of Sciences Magazine: March /April 2000
[online]).
Researchers analysing the brain and the influence of active music making on the brain, have
reported several interesting findings. In 1998, researchers at the University of Münster, in
Germany, reported 3 their discovery that music lessons in childhood definitely enlarged the
brain. They found that the area in the musician’s brain used to analyse the particular pitch of a
musical note was enlarged by 25%, compared to a non-musician who had never played an
instrument before (Music makes you smarter: Researchers found that active music making
expands the brain [s.a.][online]).
Scientists conducting this experiment on musicians and others used a magnetic brain imaging
machine and aimed it at the musician’s auditory cortex. The auditory cortex is the area where
sounds are processed and this part of the brain contains cells, called neurons, which are
sensitive to various sound frequencies. Neurons that fire in reaction to the same frequency
tend to gather into little groups, creating a sound frequency map in the auditory cortex.
Findings suggest that practice and experience (active music making) have enlarged this area
3 These findings were first published in the April 23, 1998 issue of Nature
13
in the brain and that the earlier the child starts musical training, the bigger the area of the
brain appears to be. They also concluded that experienced musicians used more neurons to
process sounds and could synchronise those sounds much better, as the result of their
training (Morrison, 1998 [online]).
In a two-year experiment done with preschoolers by Dr. Gordon Shaw of the University of
California at Irvine and Frances Rauscher, preschoolers studying the piano were compared to
preschoolers receiving computer lessons. The research findings suggested that the
performance of preschoolers studying the piano was 34% higher on spatial and temporal
reasoning tasks than that of preschoolers studying computers (Rauscher et al., 1997: 2-8).
In another experiment, children who had taken singing and keyboard lessons were studied
and compared with preschoolers who received no music lessons. The preschoolers taking
music lessons scored 80% higher than the control group when they had to perform object-
assembly tasks (Rauscher et al., 1994).
In an experiment done by Frances Rauscher at the University of California in 1994, it was

found that preschoolers who took keyboard lessons for eight months exhibited a 46% increase
in their spatial reasoning IQ. A different experiment conducted with disadvantaged
preschoolers, found that the preschoolers displayed a dramatic improvement in their spatial
reasoning abilities after receiving music training (Music makes you smarter: Researchers
found that active music making expands the brain [s.a.] [online]).
As part of an experiment, Frances Rauscher and Gordon Shaw played Mozart’s Piano Sonata
K448 to college students just before they had to take an IQ test. They found that the students
who listened to this particular piece of music showed a significant increase in their spatial
scores (Rauscher et al.,1993: 611).
During October 1995, researchers at the University of Konstanz, Germany, conducted

research on the influence of exposure to music on neural circuit rewiring. They examined the
brains of nine string players, using magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) technology, made
interesting findings. They found that the size of the somatosensory cortex dedicated to the
fingering digits (the thumbs and fifth fingers of their left hands) of these musicians was
14
considerably larger than in non-players. They furthermore found that the number of time these
musicians practised every day did not influence or affect their cortical maps. They found,
however, that the age at which these musicians started with initial music lessons on their
instrument influenced the amount of cortex that was used during playing. The earlier the
young child was exposed to music lessons, the more cortex was used and devoted to playing
this instrument (Begley, 1996 [online]).
In 1994, at Rhode Island, a sequential, skill-building music programme was presented to

students of two elementary schools. Researchers found that these students showed an
improvement in their math skills after a period of time (Music makes you smarter:
Researchers found that active music making expands the brain [s.a.] [online]).
In 1994, Lewis Thomas conducted a study of medical school applicants. He found that 66% of
music majors who applied to medical schools were accepted compared to only 44% of
biochemistry majors that were accepted. The music majors represented the highest
percentage of any group that was accepted (Music makes you smarter: Researchers found
that active music making expands the brain [s.a.] [online]).
According to Scott-Kassner (1999: 20), it is of importance to move beyond the debate around
the evidence of the neurological impact of music on the child and rather to focus on the wide
variety of other reasons why music is significant to the development of the whole child (Scott-
Kassner, 1999: 20).
Therefore, even though there is enough evidence of the importance of music education for the
development of the child’s brain, we are also going to look at other aspects.
2.6 Music can contribute to the physical development of the child

15
With regard to the overall and musical development of the young child, it is of importance that
educators and parents do not underestimate the importance of the child’s physical
development. Children’s physical development influences how they interact and are involved
in the world around them; their bodies become instruments with which they can explore and
obtain information about the world around them.
Children’s health, appearance and physical capabilities greatly influence other aspects and
abilities in their lives, such as their cognitive abilities, affective stability, social acceptance and
positive self-image. Thus, every facet of children’s overall development is influenced by their
physical condition and development.
Music can play an important role in children’s physical development and it is of importance
that music educators and parents have knowledge of the characteristics of each physical
developmental stage of the child when planning music activities. Basic guidelines for
children’s physical development can be summarised as:
• An infant’s movements always start developing from the head down to the feet
(cephalcaudal). For example: babies first learn to control their heads and shoulders
before being able to sit up.
• Muscle control in children develops from the midline of their bodies to the extremities
(proximodistal). Children progress from gaining gross motor control to fine motor
control. Therefore complete arm movements will always precede the fine muscle
movements of their fingers (Grobler, 1990: 34).
Creating music through instrumental play and singing is regarded as physical education and
demands excellent co-ordination of fingers, hands, arms, lips, cheeks and other muscles of
the face. In singing, considerable control of the diaphragm is required, resulting in the back,
stomach and chest muscles also being used (Music makes you smarter: Why We Teach
Music [s.a.] [online]).
Music can be used to help children understand their bodies' potential and limitations, resulting
in a more complete body image. The following contributions from music develop specific
motor skills:
16
• Gross motor control skills: Children can be encouraged to perform rhythmical

movements with their bodies. Performing action songs, dances and singing games are
examples of music activities that will encourage these kinds of movements (Grobler,
1990: 35).
• Fine motor control skills: Music activities that are suitable in developing these skills are:
playing of instruments, singing and performing finger games and playing singing games
(Grobler, 1990: 35).
• Balancing skills: Children improve their posture, body control and balance by
performing rhythmical movements with their whole bodies. Performing action songs,
dances and singing games are examples of musical activities that will encourage these
kinds of movements (Grobler, 1990: 35).
• Eye-hand co-ordination skills: Children can improve this by handling instruments or by

singing and playing hand-clapping games with a partner (Grobler, 1990: 35).
• Eye-foot co-ordination skills: Children can improve this by performing singing games,
body percussion, dances and other rhythmical foot movements (Grobler, 1990: 35).
• Laterality skills: This skill can be improved by performing singing games that involve
both sides of the body or by handling instruments. Hand-clapping games that require
cross-clapping with a partner is a suitable activity for improving laterality (Grobler,
1990: 35).
2.7 Music can contribute to the emotional development of the child
In music education and education in general, the emotional stability of children determines the
success of teaching and music activities. Emotional stability provides the foundation from
which children are willing to explore, take risks and learn.
Emotional security is derived from the relationship of trust between children and their
environment and between themselves and caregivers to whom they look for help and
guidance. When children are emotionally secure, they experience feelings of safety, security,
trust and acceptance. Children firstly develop emotional security and trust relationships in their
family lives and later extend these to their schools (Grobler, 1990: 27, 28).
17
Children have a basic perception of themselves, the world and how they fit into it with all their
abilities and weaknesses. Through the process of identification, children start to develop their
own self-concept. Children who have a positive image of themselves experience self-esteem
and will experience feelings of worth and exhibit personal confidence (Fong & Resnick, 1980:
374).
Children can only develop positively on an emotional level when they have a positive self-
concept and self-esteem. Children with positive self-concepts have the confidence, security
and willingness to risk challenges and to solve problems. Children develop a positive self-
concept and feeling of self-worth when they experience acceptance from people around them,
as well as when they receive approval from peers and adults on mastering a task successfully
(Grobler, 1990: 28).
Children’s self-esteem plays an important role in their level of aspiration and achievement.
Children who have a high and positive self-esteem tend to develop into active, secure people
who are successful at an academic and social level. Children with low self-esteem tend to feel
inferior, are fearful of interacting with others, try to gain social approval and often feel
discouraged and depressed. A direct relationship is found between how high children or
people aim and strive to achieve, and how much children or people value themselves (Fong &
Resnick, 1980: 374,375).
Music and active participation in music contributes to a positive self-image in children.
Participation in musical activities provides several opportunities for children to experience
success. When suitable musical activities are chosen according to each child’s unique level
of readiness and ability, the child does not risk the danger of failing or making mistakes. The
simple mastering of a song, ability to handle an instrument or ability to produce sound as
accompaniment for a song will provide the child with a feeling of success (Grobler, 1990: 29).
Music can furthermore provide children with opportunities for individualising and developing
an own identity. Children develop a positive self-concept when they are able to see
themselves as unique personalities, each with an own identity. Musical activities that include
the child’s own name in a song, or in which children can exercise their own choice of
instrument to imitate certain sounds, or are allowed to perform their own movements and
improvise freely to music in their own, unique way, all contribute to children’s awareness of
18
themselves and their own, unique identities. Songs from different cultures or languages can
provide children with opportunities to identify with their own nation, language and culture
(Grobler, 1990: 29).
In 1992, researchers at the Auburn University conducted a study with children at risk. An arts
programme that included music was presented to these children. Researchers found that the
overall self-concept of children participating in this programme improved significantly over a
period of time (Music makes you smarter: Researchers found that active music making
expands the brain [s.a.] [online]).
Educators are able to guide and accompany children on the way to emotional stability.
Educators can achieve this by creating a relationship of trust and safety between them and
the child, by setting a positive example to children and by motivating children intrinsically.
When children experience joy and satisfaction while participating in musical activities, they will
look forward to future musical activities and envision joyful participation. This intrinsic
motivation leads to spontaneous interest and co-operation, resulting in music becoming a
meaningful experience to them (Grobler, 1990: 29,30).
2.8 Music can contribute to the social development of the child
Since music has so much to do with the molding of character, it is necessary

that we teach it to our children - Aristotle (quoted by Machover & Uszler, 1996:
xii).
In music education, educators acknowledge the young child as a “child-in-totality”. Although

music is taught to children by music educators for the sake of music itself, the secondary aims
and benefits of music education are recognised and regarded as important in the holistic
development of the child. Children’s social, physical and cognitive development can
furthermore not be set apart from each other, since all these aspects constantly influence one
another.
The social development of young children is considered to be one of the most crucial goals of
pre-primary education and positive music experiences and activities can contribute to the
actualisation of this important goal.
19
The following social skills are acquired through positive musical experiences and activities:
• Group participation and socially appropriate behaviours: By participating and

interacting within a group, children experience feelings of harmony and unity. Children
show growth and maturity in their interpersonal relationships when they are involved
with peers in musical activities that require co-operative planning, resolving of
problems and sharing accomplishments and responsibilities with others.
Group participation guides the young child from self-centred thinking and egocentric
behaviours to more appropriate social behaviours. Children learn that their own
interests are secondary to the demands of the group. Children learn to share, take
turns, to respect the views of others, that everyone cannot be satisfied at the same
time and to submit and obey the instructions of a group (Grobler, 1990: 32,33).
• Improved communication skills: According to Nye (1979: 169), musical activities are
among the most effective devices for developing the use of language. Music is a
wonderful medium and it makes using language more fun and more pleasurable.
It is essential that children learn to communicate in order to establish social contact.

Young children have a desire to understand, represent and share their experiences
symbolically with others and can communicate either verbally (through language) or
non-verbally (through movement or instrumental playing). Through music activities,
children observe how educators and children communicate with each other, they
develop and improve their language competence and learn how to interpret and define
music in words, movement or in playing an instrument (Grobler, 1990: 33).
• Leadership: During musical activities, children who have leadership qualities have the
opportunity to show leadership within a group. Natural leaders will step forward and be
accepted by the group if they have already proven themselves as individuals who
create intriguing ideas and suggestions. Shy and introverted children are the opposite
of natural leaders and do not have the desire to lead a group or to be singled out.
These children feel safe and secure within a group and will participate and even take
risks within the safety of the group setting (Grobler, 1990: 33).
• Awareness of cultural and national identity: As children continue to participate in social

activities and to develop, their socialisation is gradually extended from their immediate
20
family to their school, their community, their nation and to their specific culture
(Grobler, 1990: 34).
2.9 Musical Intelligence: One of the intelligences according to Howard Gardner’s

Theory of Multiple Intelligences
I am convinced that all of us have a biological guarantee of musicianship. This is

true regardless of our age, formal experience with music, or the size and shape
of our fingers, lips or ears . . . We all have music inside us, and can learn how to
get it out, one way or another (Professor Frank Wilson, as quoted by Armstrong,
1993: 73).
Howard Gardner’s theory of multiple intelligences initially categorised human beings wide
range of skills and capabilities into at least seven extensive categories or intelligences. These
original and first seven intelligences are: Linguistic Intelligence; Logical-mathematical
Intelligence; Spatial Intelligence; Bodily-Kinaesthetic Intelligence; Musical Intelligence;
Interpersonal Intelligence; and Intrapersonal Intelligence (Gardner, 1983: 8). Today educators
and researchers acknowledge that there are far more than seven intelligences that can be
identified in human beings.
According to Armstrong (1994: 13), Gardner emphasises that this model is only a temporary
formulation and that new intelligences could be identified and added to the list. Suggestions of
new intelligences to be added are: Spirituality; emotional intelligence; naturalism; moral
sensibility; sexuality; humour; intuition; creativity; culinary ability; olfactory perception (sense
of smell); and the ability to combine the other intelligences.
Musical Intelligence is described as the ability or capacity of an individual to perceive,

discriminate, transform and express music and musical forms. Characteristics that are
included in musical intelligence are sensitivity to the rhythm, pitch, or melody, and timbre or
tone colour of a musical piece (Armstrong, 1994: 13).
21
Appreciation of music is also considered as one of the main characteristics of musical

intelligence (Armstrong, 1993: 10)
These abilities (to perceive, discriminate, transform and express) of musically intelligent
individuals can be seen in the different roles that individuals play in music. A music aficionado
or enthusiast is a person who exhibits the capacity to perceive. A music critic is a person who
exhibits the capacity to discriminate. A composer exhibits the capacity to transform, while a
performer exhibits the capacity to express (Armstrong, 1994: 13). Regular concert-goers are
individuals who exhibit the capacity to appreciate music. Musical talent is the first intelligence
to appear in the child’s development and emerges before any of the other intelligences
(Gardner, 1993: 99).
According to Armstrong (1987: 22), musically gifted children can be recognised and identified
easily. These children will immediately start to move around and sing when a music recording
is being played for them. They also enjoy singing, humming and whistling tunes quietly to
themselves, while others will exhibit their musical potential through simple music appreciation.
Musically intelligent children have strong opinions about music that is being played on the
radio or television, are sensitive to sounds around them in the environment and will usually be
the ones that lead a group in singing.
Musically gifted children can furthermore exhibit the following behaviours:
• They enjoy and are able to play musical instruments;

• They remember the melodies of songs;
• They can identify a particular musical note as off-key;
• They will express their need to have music when they are studying;
• They enjoy collecting tapes, records and CDs;
• They enjoy singing songs to themselves;
• They are able to rhythmically keep time to music (Armstrong, 1987: 22)
The four important key points to remember according to Gardner’s research, are:
• All children and individuals possess and have abilities in all of these seven
intelligences;
22
• Everyone has the ability to develop these seven intelligences to a reasonably high level
of capability if they receive necessary and appropriate encouragement, enrichment and
instruction;
• These intelligences cannot exist by themselves and are constantly interacting with
each other in complex ways;
• There is a wide variety of ways to be intelligent and by which people can show their
talents within a specific intelligence, as well as between different intelligences
(Armstrong, 1994: 11,12).
There are, however, activators and deactivators of intelligence that can influence each
intelligence in a positive or negative way. There are events that occur in early childhood which
are considered as “turning points” in the development of a person’s talents and
abilities(Armstrong, 1994: 22). Two fundamental processes in the development of
intelligences are crystallising experiences and paralysing experiences (Gardner, 1983:
113).
Crystallising experiences are positive and considered as “the spark that lights an
intelligence”. Crystallising experiences will encourage an intelligence to grow and develop
towards maturity. For the well-known musician, Yehudi Menuhin, a crystallising musical
experience occurred when his parents took him to a symphony concert when he was only four
years old. His experience of the concert was so positive and enthralling that he afterwards
asked his parents for a violin as birthday present. He also insisted on having the specific violin
soloist that he saw performing that evening, to teach him how to play the violin (Armstrong,
1994: 22).
Paralysing experiences are negative experiences that can result in the “shutdown” of a
particular experience. Negative and humiliating remarks from parents or teachers can cause
the child to experience negative emotions such as shame, guilt, fear and anger. Negative
comments such as, “You are singing out of tune” or “stop making that noise” can result in
negative and paralysing experiences and can even contribute to the shutdown of musical
intelligence (Armstrong, 1994: 23).
23
According to Armstrong, it is never too late to develop an individual’s musical intelligence.

Formal music lessons are not the only way to develop musical intelligence. Individuals can
express their musical intelligence through simple appreciation of recorded and live music and
can furthermore develop their intelligence by becoming educated music listeners and by
taking a more active role in listening to music (Armstrong, 1993: 74).
According to the composer Aaron Copland, individuals can improve their musical and listening
skills and cultivate a critical musical ear by exposing themselves to a wider variety and
selection of music and by taking an active role in music appreciation. “You can deepen your
understanding of music only by being a more conscious and aware listener – not someone
who is just listening, but someone who is listening for something” Copland, as quoted by
Armstrong (1993: 75).
The following suggestions are made by Armstrong (1993: 75,76) for adults to develop their
own, as well as their children’s, musical intelligence.
• Sing spontaneously in the shower or while travelling;

• Play musical games with friends or family, such as “Name that tune”;
• Attend concerts or musicals;
• Develop your own collection of favourite musical recordings and listen to them
regularly;
• Join your local church or community choir;
• Take formal music lessons for a specific musical instrument that you always wanted to
learn to play;
• Work with a music therapist;
• Spend an hour a week listening to a style of music that is unfamiliar to you;
• Establish a regular time at which you as family can sing together;
• Buy a keyboard and teach yourself simple melodies and chords;
• Buy rhythm instruments such as tambourines or sleigh bells and play them rhythmically
to music;
• Enrol in a music appreciation course;
• Read music criticism in newspapers and magazines;
24
• Volunteer to sing and perform music at hospitals, day-care centres or retirement

homes;
• Listen to background music while studying, working or eating;
• Discuss music as a topic with your friends and family;
• Read about the lives of famous composers and musicians;
• Listen to sounds around you (footsteps) or sounds from nature (birds singing) and try
to hear and identify the natural melodies and rhythms that occur in these sounds;
• Listen and re-discover the music that you loved as a child;
• Make up (compose) your own tunes;
• Create a musical autobiography of your own life and collect music that represents, or
was popular at, different stages of your life;
• Make a list of all the music that you hear in one day;
• Buy yourself a computer software and MIDI-compatible keyboard and teach yourself
music theory or play a musical instrument on the computer;
• Sing all your communications to your children for an hour or two.
2.10 Music can be of therapeutic value to the child
The Canadian Association for Music Therapy defines music therapy as
...the skillful use of music and musical elements by an accredited music

therapist to promote, maintain, and restore mental, physical, emotional, and
spiritual health. Music has non-verbal, creative, structural, and emotional
qualities. These are used in the therapeutic relationship to facilitate contact,
interaction, self-awareness, learning, self-expression, communication, and
personal development (Canadian Association for Music Therapy: What Music
Therapy is [s.a.] [online]). 4
Another definition is that music therapy requires the use and prescription of music and music-
related strategies or approaches by a qualified music therapist. These strategies are used to
4 This definition of music therapy was formulated by the Canadian Association for Music Therapy at their annual
general meeting on May 6, 1994, at Vancouver, British Columbia.
25
support and motivate individuals toward a particular, non-musical objective (Prelude Music
Therapy Home Page: Music Therapy Information [s.a.] [online]).
Lennie Tan, president of the Music Therapist Association of British Columbia, has stated that
music therapy, in the simplest of terms, can be referred to as “using music in a therapeutic
way to heal” (Lee, [s.a.][online]).
Therapists use music therapy with a large variety of individuals, regardless of their age, their
impairment or disability, or their musical experience. Music therapists can use music
therapeutically for children. Some of the areas in which therapists specialise are: brain
injuries; autism and other extensive development disabilities; developmental and physical
disabilities; hearing, visual, speech and language impairments; emotional traumas; mental
health, in neonatal care, oncology and pain control (Canadian Association for Music Therapy:
Who music therapy may be useful for [s.a.][online]).
Lennie Tan stated that music therapy is used by therapists to help patients to manage their
lives and at the same time discover more about themselves and who they as individuals are
(Lee, [s.a.][online]).
2.10.1 The Therapeutic characteristics of Music
Music exhibits the following therapeutic characteristics:
• music stimulates the brain and can capture and engage children’s attention;
• music can easily be adapted to and reflects children’s abilities;
• music can arrange time in such a way that children can comprehend the concept of
time;
• music supplies children with a meaningful and fun medium for practice and repetition;
• music supplies children with a safe, structured and social setting from where they can
communicate, verbally and non-verbally;
• music can be a useful memory aid;
• music inspires and encourages children to perform movements;
• music can bring back memories and feelings;
26
• music and its accompanying silence give immediate and non-verbal feedback;
• music is success-orientated and children of all ages and abilities can share in music
activities (Prelude Music Therapy Home Page: Music Therapy Information [s.a.]
[online]).
2.10.2 The long-term goals of music therapy
The overall and universal aim that music therapists want to actualise with music as therapy is
to involve individuals actively in their own growth, development and behavioural changes.
Music therapists strive to help individuals transfer musical and non-musical abilities to other
facets of their lives. By achieving this aim, music therapy helps and brings individuals from a
passive world of isolation into a world of active interaction and participation (Boxill, [s.a.]
[online]).
When practising music therapy with children, therapists strive to achieve the following long-
term goals:
• to improve children’s self-image and consciousness of their bodies;

• to enhance children’s communication abilities;
• to increase children’s skill to use their energy purposefully;
• to decrease any maladaptive behaviours that children might exhibit, such as
stereotypic, obsessive, self-abusive, aggressive, disorderly, perserverative,
unpredictable behaviours;
• to improve children’s interaction with peers and others around them;
• to improve children’s self-sufficiency and self-direction;
• to stimulate children’s creativity, inventiveness and imagination;
• to strengthen children’s emotional expression and change;
• to improve and enhance children’s fine and gross motor skills;
• to improve children's auditory recognition and understanding (Boxill [s.a.] [online]).
2.10.3 Activities used in music therapy

27
Music therapists can help children with speech impairments to improve their articulation of
words, breath control and rhythm through singing. Singing lyrics can help children with
mental disabilities to sequence a task, while singing with a group helps them to develop a
greater awareness of those around them (Canadian Association for Music Therapy: How
music is used therapeutically [s.a.][online]).
Children with motor impairments can improve their fine and gross motor coordination by
playing instruments. During therapy, children with behavioural problems are encouraged to
work within a group setting and to play an instrument in an ensemble. This helps them to
control any disruptive or disorderly behaviour and impulses. By mastering and performing a
piece of music, children enhance their musical skills, develop positive self-esteem and self-
discipline and become more self-reliant (Canadian Association for Music Therapy: How music
is used therapeutically [s.a.] [online]).
Children are encouraged by therapists to respond, through rhythmic movements, to music

and to develop their range of movements, agility and suppleness, strength, balance, co-
ordination, breathing patterns and muscular relaxation. The rhythmic element in music raises
children’s enthusiasm, involvement, joy and pleasure and can furthermore persuade them,
non-verbally, to socialise (Canadian Association for Music Therapy: How music is used
therapeutically [s.a.] [online]).
The music therapist can use improvisation as a useful evaluation technique to establish a
relationship of trust with the child. Through improvisation, children can express their emotions
in a creative and non-verbal way. Vocal, instrumental and movement improvisations enable
children to interact with others, explore feelings which are too difficult to communicate in
words, to make their own decisions and choices, and to deal with structure in a creative
manner (Canadian Association for Music Therapy: How music is used therapeutically
[s.a.][online]).
Therapists use composing as a tool to encourage children to share their opinions, emotions
and experiences. Furthermore, composing enhances co-operative learning and self-
awareness and helps children to explore their feelings (Canadian Association for Music
Therapy: How music is used therapeutically [s.a.] [online]).
28
Listening to music can enhance children’s cognitive abilities, such as concentration and
memory. By listening to music in a relaxed and open-minded state, thoughts, images and
emotions are being stimulated. Listening to music can furthermore help children to recall
memories and associations (Canadian Association for Music Therapy: How music is used
therapeutically [s.a.] [online]).
2.11. Music provides a means for personal expression, as well as pleasure and joy
The desires and emotions of human beings, regardless of their simplicity or complexity, has
always been expressed and reflected through art and other aesthetic forms. Through time,
human beings have always reacted and responded to personal experiences and expressions
through music. This human ability to express emotions through symbols such as music can be
regarded as the highest accomplishment of human beings.
The uniqueness of music as a medium of expression is that music, compared to words, is not
bound by specific meanings. Music supplies individuals with opportunities for personal
expression and unique interpretation of emotions, experiences and music. These unique
musical responses can vary from one individual to another, depending on each individual’s
level of experience and comprehension (Bergethon et al., 1986: 4).
According to Barbara Andress, professor emerita of Music Education at Arizona State
University, early childhood music education nurtures a lifelong disposition toward music.
Although not all children who receive music education will eventually become performers,
music can and will still play a very important part in their lives. Music can be used as a means
for children to derive pleasure and comfort, as well as a medium for communicating
aesthetically (Ponick, 1999: 37).
2.12 Conclusion
29
This chapter has focussed on the importance of music and music education and eleven
different reasons why parents should provide music education for their children were given,
discussed and emphasised, together with research supporting these different points.
30
CHAPTER 3: WHEN TO START MUSIC EDUCATION WITH THE CHILD

(Question: When should the parent start their child’s music education?)
The chapter that follows presents a discussion of the sound environment of the womb and of
how the fetal auditory system develops and matures. Research on the influence of sound and
learning in utero is also considered, the role of parents is discussed and practical prenatal
stimulation activities are suggested. In this chapter some of the research that is mentioned will
be referred to through secondary sources which will be given in footnotes.
3.1 Prenatal Research
...it is interesting in our society that we really only consider the child to be alive
once it is born. The Chinese, when the child is born, count it as being one year
old which shows that they recognise the fact that a child has a life in the uterus.
(Macfarlane, 1976 5, quoted in Müller-Zürich, 1982: 22)
Extensive prenatal research has revealed interesting and important information about the
sound environment of the womb, fetal development, the abilities of the fetus in the womb, and
the influence that prenatal stimulation with sound and music has on the child.
3.1.1 The Sound Environment of the Womb
The first human intra-abdominal recordings were made in 1968 with the help of microphones
covered with rubber membranes. These microphones were placed in the vagina or cervix and
the recordings that were made portrayed the womb as a very noisy environment (72-96dB)
(Lecanuet, 1996: 4).
Recent studies using hydrophones adapted to fluid impedance and narrowband analysis,
have, however, provided contrasting findings. The intra-uterine background noise that was
recorded consisted of three types of sounds: electronic sounds made by the hydrophones
and amplifiers; ambient external noises; a variety of maternal and fetal noises (respiratory,
5 Macfarlane, A. Pre- and Peri-natal factors affecting post-natal behaviour. Lecture: N.C.T. Torbay study
31
movements, gastrointestinal, cardiovascular, laryngeal). Researchers found that the womb

was a relatively quiet place with a sound environment approximately ranging between 50 and
60dB (Lecanuet, 1996: 4).
All these uterine sounds form a carpet of sound for the neonate. The mother’s voice, however,
appears to be heard very distinctively and above the sound carpet by the neonate. Since the
mother’s voice is so different to the amniotic environment, the neonate gives special attention
to her voice. These sounds that the mother makes are very important and are considered to
be the first form of communication, connection and bonding between mother and child.
Observations made by other researchers suggest that newborns became calmer and more
self-regulated when they were exposed to recordings of these intrauterine sounds (Whitwell,
[s.a.] [online]).
3.1.2 Development and Maturation of the Fetal Auditory System
Compared to the other senses, the child’s sense of hearing is considered to be the most
developed sense before birth. The ear of the fetus develops in the third week of gestation and
starts to perform its functions by week sixteen. Between the fourth and sixth weeks of
gestation, the vestibular and cochlear systems become differentiated and the auditory ossicles
start to develop between the seventh and eighth weeks. Between week 16 and 17 the ear of
the fetus has an adult-like shape and size. Although the ear’s construction is not complete by
week 16, the fetus is already able to hear and respond to a sound pulse. The cochlear
structures of the ear start to function by week 20. Mature synapses have been identified
between week 24 and 28 and the fetus starts to listen actively to sounds at week 24. Most
formal fetal stimulation programmes are therefore designed to start during the third trimester
of pregnancy (week 20), as the sense of hearing is believed to be the best developed of all the
senses before birth (Whitwell, [s.a.] [online]).
The inner ear consists of two parts: the cochlea and the vestibular system (Whitwell, [s.a.]
[online]). According to Ayres (1983: 185) the vestibular system can be defined as “the sensory
system that responds to the position of the head in relation to gravity and accelerated or
day. 1976. P.1.

32
decelerated movement”. If the vestibular system functions correctly, the pull of gravity will
produce a consistent sensory flow from early fetal life, until death. The flow through the
nervous system which results from gravity creates certain sensations that help with the
formation and construction of a fundamental reference for all the other sensory inputs.
Children’s vestibular systems need to function correctly for them to be able to perform certain
body movements, to be able to balance themselves and to integrate and combine their
movements (Ayres, 1983: 70).
Body movements, balance and the integration of movements are three aspects that are
controlled by the vestibular system and all of these aspects are involved in the rhythm of
music making (Whitwell, [s.a.] [online]).
The cochlear system is responsible for and allows acoustic vibrations to convert into nervous
influx. Resulting from this, melodies that carry higher frequencies can be heard by the fetus. It
is of importance that melodies and rhythms that are chosen for prenatal music stimulation
should be simple and uncomplicated (Whitwell, [s.a.] [online]).
Due to the fact that the vestibular system develops rapidly in the first trimester of pregnancy,
active movements performed by the fetus can already be seen in utero. Regular exercise
patterns, such as rolling, flexing and turning, have been observed through ultrasound in the
first trimester. The fetus furthermore, performs self-initiated and expressive movements such
as waving of arms, kicking of legs, flexing the back and neck, turning the head and even
somersaults.
In the second trimester, the fetus floats peacefully and will perform movements such as
kicking, turning, sighing and grabbing its umbilical chord. The fetus tends to get excited when
sudden noises occur, calms down when the mother talks quietly and is rocked to sleep by the
mother’s walking. The heart of the fetus is fully developed by this time and its pulse rate varies
between 120 and 160 beats per minute.
According to W. Ernest Freud, quoted by Whitwell, ([s.a.] [online]), "a rhythm itself provides a
most reassuring ‘cradle’ because of its promise of repetition and continuity”. Research done
33
by Salk (1960) 6, Murooka, H. Koie, Y. & Suda, N (1976) 7 and De Casper and Sigafoos (1983) 8
has produced evidence that newborns in fact learn and remember their mother’s heartbeat in
utero.
Further research done by Salk (1960) 9 has shown that newborns gained weight at a faster
rate and their breathing was deeper and more constant when they were exposed to and
listened to the heartbeat of their mothers.
Ashley Montagu (1962) 10 has proposed that the reason why music is universally appealing
and rhythmic sounds have a soothing effect on humans could possibly be related to the
feeling of well-being that the fetus experiences in utero due to the mother's constant and
reassuring heartbeat (Whitwell, [s.a.][online]).
3.1.3 Research on the influence of sound and learning in utero
According to Carlotte Mistretta and Robert Bradley, 11 as quoted by the BabyPlus Company, it
is strange that the possibility of changing the human brain and behavioural growth prenatally,
through intrauterine sensory stimulation, has not received enough thought or attention. They
suggest that future studies should be undertaken to provide more information about the
success of the intra- versus extrauterine environments and the influence that they have on the
development of the nervous system in different types of species (The BabyPlus Company:
Prenatal Brain Cell Death [s.a.][online]).
6 Salk, L. (1960). The effects of the normal heartbeat sound on the behaviour of the newborn infant: implications
for mental health. World Mental Health, 12, 1-8.
7 Murooka, H. Koie, Y. & Suda, N. (1976). Analyse des sons intra-uterins et leurs effets tranquil-lisants sur le
nouveau. Journal of Gynecology and Obstetrics: Biologie de la Reproduction, 5, 367-376.
8 De Casper, A.J. & Sigafoos, A.D. (1983). The intrauterine heartbeat: A potent reinforcer for newborns. Infant
Behaviour and Development 6, 19-25.
9 Salk, L. (1960). The effects of the normal heartbeat sound on the behaviour of the newborn infant: implications
for mental health. World Mental Health, 12, 1-8.
10 Montagu, A. (1962). Prenatal Influences. Springfield, IL: Charles Thomas.
11 Effects of early Sensory Experience in Brain and Behavioural development, Studies on the Development of
behaviour and the Nervous System, Volume 4, Early Influences, edited by Gilbert Gottlieb, Academic Press, New
York, 1978, pages 233,240.
34
According to Professor Susan Ludington-Hoe 12 of the University of California School of

Nursing, first synapses in the brain of the fetus can occur as early as the seventh day after
conception. Specialists in the field of fetal and infant brain development emphasise that fetal
stimulation of the infant’s senses could have an influence and effect on the development of
the child’s brain synapses. They suggest that the lack of neural connections can cause nerve
cells to die prenatally, especially in the eighth month of pregnancy. Professor Colin
Blakemore 13 of Oxford University has stated that the brain of the eight-month-old fetus is
estimated to have at least two to three times as many nerve cells as the brain of an adult.
According to Blakemore, a massive death of brain cells occurs just before birth. The cells that
die are regarded as excessive and unnecessary. The process of brain cell death continues
through childhood and eventually levels off (The BabyPlus Company: Prenatal Brain Cell
Death [s.a.] [online]).
The excess of cells that are disposed of and die during prenatal brain cell death has been
described as an “over programming” by Dr Brent Logan 14. This surplus of cells ensures the
survival and provision of a sufficient number of cells that will enable the brain to perform its
primary functions (The BabyPlus Company: A Heartbeat away from blissful birth 15 [s.a.]
[online])
Scientists have gone further and have named the prenatal brain just before neuronal death a
“protobrain”. These researchers have found that stimulating the protobrain of rats prenatally,
could save some of the protobrain, and this resulted in super intelligent rats with extra neurons
that could be observed just after birth. Dr Brent Logan refers to a “window of opportunity” that
is present before birth. According to him, this opportunity should be used for prenatal
stimulation, otherwise any extra brain cells and brain potential will die and go away (The
BabyPlus Company: Report on Baby+ Research [s.a.] [online]).
12 How to have a smarter baby, Rawson Associates, New York, 1985, page35.
13 Auliffe, K. 1985. Making of a Mind, Omni Magazine, October 1985, p. 67.
14 Dr Brent Logan is the director and founder of the Prenatal Institute in Seattle. He has developed a prenatal
stimulation programme called "The Cardiac Curriculum" in the form of cassettes and a maternal speaker belt. He
claims to provide "sonic enrichment" to pregnant mothers and infants and is well known for his programme and
research.
15 Clinical report, HOSPITAL DOCTOR, London, 1 March 1990.

35
Research done by Spelt (1948) 16 revealed that unborn babies can be taught and can learn
prenatally. Since it was known that the fetus will react to any loud noise by kicking or moving,
he conducted an experiment in which a vibrator was applied to the pregnant mother’s
stomach. He gave the fetus several “practice” experiences by applying both the vibrator and
loud noises at the same time. He came to the conclusion that once the child has learned this
“lesson”, this conditioning or “learnt lesson” would last until the day that the child is born (Fong
& Resnick, 1980: 260,261).
Research involving Japanese pregnant women living near the Osaka airport revealed
interesting results. According to researchers, the constant environmental noises that came
from the airport had a negative effect on the fetuses. The babies that were born were smaller
in size and there was an increased occurrence of prematurity amongst these pregnant
mothers. Research done by Szmeja (1979) 17 suggested that chronic noise could be
connected with birth defects (Whitwell, [s.a.] [online]).
Michele Clements (1977) 18 did research in a London maternity hospital and found that fetuses
of four to five months old were soothed and calmed by music passages by Vivaldi and Mozart.
In contrast, they were disturbed by very loud passages by Beethoven, Brahms and Rock
music (Whitwell, [s.a.][online]).
The New Zealand fetologist, William Liley, observed that from week twenty-five a fetus would
jump in rhythm to the music when the timpanist in an orchestra played during a concert
(Whitwell, [s.a.] [online]).
16 Spelt, D.K. The conditioning of the human fetus in utero. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 1948, 38, 338-
346.
17 Szmeja, Z., Slomko, Z. & Sikorski, H. (1979) The risk of hearing impairment in children from mothers exposed
to noise during pregnancy, Int. Journal of Pediatric Otorhino-laryngology, 1, 221-229
18 Clements, Michele (1977), Observations on certain aspects of neonatal behaviour in response to auditory
stimuli. Paper presented to the fifth International Congress of Psychosomatic Obstetrics and Gynecology, Rome.
36
Research performed by Satt (1987) 19 showed that newborns preferred a melody that the
mother sang to them in utero to a new song that the mother might sing to them (Whitwell [s.a.]
[online]), while Peter Hepper (1991) 20 conducted research with pregnant mothers who had to
listen daily to the music of a TV soap opera called “Neighbours”. When this music was played
to the newborns after birth, they would listen with rapt attention, their heart rate and
movements would decrease considerably, and they would change to a more alert state. This
research suggests evidence of long-term memory in the baby (Whitwell, [s.a.] [online]).
The maternal emotions of the mother appear to have a chemical effect on the fetus. Since the
mother and child shares hormones, stress can be transferred to the fetus through the release
of stress hormones. These hormones are carried in the blood through the placental barrier
and can result in positive or negative reactions by the baby (Fong and Resnick, 1980: 55).
3.2 The Child’s first introduction to Music
3.2.1 The role of the parents
“Formerly I maintained that the musical education of a child should start nine
months before birth. I now amend this statement, it should start nine months
before the birth of the child’s mother” Zoltàn Kodàly (1882-1967) 21 (as quoted
by Müller-Zürich, 1982: 30).
According to Scott-Kassner (1999: 20), parents are children’s first and most influential
teachers. Parents are able to reach their children through music when they are still in the
womb and can comfort their newborn babies with soothing lullabies. They can sing
spontaneous songs to their toddlers, dance with them, play simple rhythmic games, take their
children to music concerts and events, play good quality music recordings to them, provide
19 Satt, B.J. (1984). An investigation into the acoustical induction of intra-uterine learning. PhD Dissertation,
Californian School of Professional Psychology, Los Angeles.
20 Hepper, P.G. (1991). An examination of fetal learning before and after birth. The Irish Journal of Psychology,
12(2), 95-107.
21 Kodàly, Z. 1974. The selected writings of Zoltan Kodàly. London: Boosey & Hawkes.
37
them with formal music lessons and encourage them to participate in school music
programmes.
The role that parents play in creating musically rich environments and the example that they
set and exhibit through their own appreciation of music, are all essential ingredients for
establishing a solid music foundation for the child and cannot be replaced or compared to any
day-care or preschool music programme (Scott-Kassner, 1999: 20).
Over several generations, parents have generally been the first to provide their children with
musical guidance, music experiences and stimulation that develop their children’s musical
abilities. Over the years, our culture has, however, started to move away from active music
making to a more passive state of consumption, with the result that parents find it nearly
impossible to be sufficient as their children’s first music teachers (Levinowitz, 1999: 18).
Research by Doxey and Wright (1990) of children’s musical abilities revealed that a strong
groundwork for future success and involvement with music can be established by providing
the child with a rich musical environment from an early age (Doxey & Wright, 1990: 425-440).
Zoltan Kodàly (1974) 22 referred to a “musical mother tongue" and believed that children
should learn music in the same way that they would learn their mother tongue (Szabo, 1999:
17).
Edwin Gordon (1990) 23 believes that the optimal time for musical development occurs before
the age of nine. After the age of nine the child’s potential for developing musically stabilises.
He came to the conclusion that children whose parents play an active role in their early
musical development achieve a higher level of development in musical ability or aptitude
quotient, by the age of nine (Szabo, 1999: 18).
Musical aptitude is often misinterpreted as talent and achievement. According to research,

every human being possesses musical aptitude, as well as the innate ability to react to
musical sounds and to control the movements of their bodies in order to create music.
22 Kodàly, Z. 1974. The selected writings of Zoltan Kodàly. London: Boosey & Hawkes.
38
Although musical aptitude may vary from one person to another, all children are capable of
achieving musically and will be highly influenced by the timing and quality of their experiences.
However, regardless of how great the child’s musical aptitude may be, the child can only
maintain this level of potential if she or he receives beneficial early music experiences on an
informal and formal level (Music improves Reasoning in Preschool Children: Advancing Music
Skills: Aptitude and Achievement [s.a.][online]).
Edwin Gordon, 24 Professor of Research in Music Education at Temple University in

Philadelphia, found that the child’s musical aptitude could actually be raised if early music
experiences are properly timed and sequenced (Music improves Reasoning in Preschool
Children: Advancing Music Skills: Aptitude and Achievement [s.a.][online]).
Begley points out that a baby arrives in the world with a jumble of neurons, all expectant to be
intertwined into the complex tapestry of the mind. It is the experiences that children have in
their childhood that determine which neurons are used and which wire the circuits of the brain
(Begley, 1996 [online]). While research has shown that there are certain critical or optimal
periods for development, it is the task of parents to expose and stimulate children correctly in
these critical periods (Begley, 1996 [online]).
The idea of critical periods or "windows of opportunity" in development was illustrated through
an experiment conducted by Wiesel and Hubel in the seventies. This experiment showed that,
after one eye of a newborn kitten was sewed shut, the kitten’s brain rewired itself. Fewer
neurons in the kitten’s brain connected the shut eye to the visual cortex. The result was that
the kitten remained blind in one eye even after the eye was opened. The same experiment
was conducted with adult cats, but did not produce the same result. The conclusion that the
researchers came to was that there is a short, early period when circuits connect the retina to
the visual cortex. This research suggests that “with the right input at the right time, almost
anything is possible” (Begley, 1996 [online]).
23 Gordon, E. 1990. A music learning theory for newborn and young children. Chicago: GIA Publications.
24 Gordon, E.E, The Nature and Description of Developmental and Stabilised Music Aptitude: Implications for
Music Learning. Temple University, Philadelphia, PA.
39
3.2.2 Practical prenatal stimulation exercises
The following practical prenatal stimulation activities can be done by pregnant women to
stimulate their babies in utero.
• Start with relaxation and visualisation exercises.

• Practising some "deep breathing" techniques will help the mother to relax.
• Communicate with the unborn child through talking and tactile stimulation (stroking of
the stomach) (Make way for Baby: Pregnancy and Prenatal stimulation [s.a.] [online]).
• The mother can listen to her favourite selection of music. This will help her to relax and
will have a positive effect on the baby.
• The mother can broaden her musical taste by listening to a wider variety of musical
styles, compositions and instrumentation. This variety can be stimulating for the fetus
and the mother.
• The mother can rock in a rocking chair for half an hour a day. This activity will be
soothing for both the mother and unborn child. This activity will furthermore supply the
fetus with vestibular stimulation.
• The mother can sing her own selection of lullabies and other songs to the fetus. This
activity should be continued when the infant is born) (Make way for Baby: Pregnancy
and Prenatal stimulation [s.a.] [online]).
3.3 Conclusion
This chapter has addressed the frequently asked question of when parents should start their
children’s musical education. Groundbreaking prenatal research, the difference between
active and passive music making, practical activities and suggestions for parents who want to
stimulate their unborn babies prenatally were discussed. Parents, especially mothers-to-be,
have the important task of providing their children, even before birth, with a rich and
stimulating musical environment. They can start to stimulate their unborn child prenatally and,
in doing so, become their child's first music teacher, communicate with their baby and form a
strong bond of love with their unborn baby.
40
CHAPTER 4: GUIDELINES AND INFORMATION TO HELP PARENTS TO

MAKE A POSITIVE CONTRIBUTION TO THE CHILD’S EARLY MUSICAL
DEVELOPMENT AND MUSIC EDUCATION
(Question: What information and guidelines can the parent use in order to make a
positive contribution to the child’s early music education?)
This chapter comprises discussion of each developmental stage, as well as every musical
experience and the musical development that children experience in each phase. Practical
activities will be given at the end of each developmental stage and the different stages are
divided into periods of one year each.
4.1 Musical development and experiences in Early Childhood
Leonard Bernstein, quoted by Machover and Uszler (1996: 4) has indicated that “[c]hildren
must receive music instruction as naturally as food, with as much pleasure as they derive
from a ball game, and this must happen from the beginning of their lives”.
4.1.1 Musical development and experiences of the infant phase

(birth to twelve months)
Plato is also quoted by Machover and Uszler (1996: 5). They apply his statement of “You
know that the beginning is the most important part of any work, especially in the case of a
young and tender thing; for that is the time at which the character is being formed” to the
musical development and experiences of the infant phase.
4.1.1.1 General Development and Characteristics of the Infant Phase
According to Fong and Resnick (1980: 171) babies are very egocentric; they view themselves
as the focus point of the world around them. Infants are not able to distinguish between
themselves, their actions and the characteristics of a given situation. Looft (1972: 76) refers to
this egocentrism as aradical egocentrism.
41
Newborn babies tend to sleep nine-tenths of the time during the first five to nine weeks of their
lives. This first stage in early infancy is referred by Heinz Remplein 25 as the “age of sleep”.
With taste, hearing and smell being present from birth, the emotional life of the newborn is
influenced by the activity of their organs (sleep and hunger) and the senses (touch, smell,
taste, vision and hearing) (Moog 1976: 47). Moog (1976: 48) quotes Remplein (1965) as
saying: “The most important characteristic of the emotional life of the newborn infant is the
predominance of feelings of displeasure over feelings of pleasure”.
Fong and Resnick (1980: 82) have indicated that perception is present at birth and is based
on the use of the senses (hearing, vision, sense of touch, smell and taste). Although
sensations are felt at birth, the ability to perceive, however, only begins to improve as the
child's body grows and matures and as experiences with people and objects around them
accumulate. The newborn’s perceptions involve the ability to perceive form, colour and
changes in light or illumination, but the ability to fixate on an object for any duration of time is
lacking. They are not able to distinguish between different objects because they can only
perceive light and colour. During the first week of infancy, though, infants become able to
make visual connections between their hands and mouths and exhibit increased visual
attentiveness and they gain the ability to track objects and individuals (Fong & Resnick, 1980:
116).
The newborn is able to hear and discriminate between sounds and has a sense of time,
rhythm, touch, pain, taste, temperature and smell. Newborn babies’ instinctive reflexes are
limited to sucking, and their movements are spontaneous and often involve a spontaneous
response to outside stimuli.
At about five to six weeks this first phase ends as infants begin to smile. This first smile is
called a "social smile” and is an active reaction to the mother’s smile or any other individuals
close to them. This second phase is known as the “age of awareness”, with infants beginning
to perceive their environment. They are not able to perceive in an objective way, though, and
still confuse their perceptions and subjective emotions. They give the objects that they
perceive a personality or a life of their own (Moog, 1976: 48).
25 Remplein, H. 1965. Die seelische Entwicklung des Menschen im Kindes-und Jugendalter, München-Basel.
42
Between the ages of one to six months, infants demonstrate an attraction to contrast, contour
and three-dimensional forms and will turn their heads in the direction of a sound. They are
observant of faces, possess almost the same visual accuracy as adults and have depth
perception (Fong & Resnick, 1980: 116).
At the age of about five months, infants start to explore the world through their senses.
Charlotte Bühler (1931) 26 calls this the “age of looking”, while Heinz Remplein refers to it as
the “age of listening”. According to Pech (1969), 27 active listening occurs earlier in the infant’s
development than active seeing. He refers to active listening as the following of sound with
interest and points out that active listening is not an involuntary action. Infants are no longer
content to sit passively and look or listen to the environment but actively start to grasp objects
around them (Moog, 1976: 48).
Infants show signs of a developing memory at the age of six to nine months and are now able
to recognise, remember and even return smiles to familiar people. There is fear of strangers,
though, and the infant will often respond to a stranger’s smile by turning away or crying
(Moog, 1976: 49). Strange sounds may even evoke a sense of anxiety to the infant (Fong &
Resnick, 1980: 116).
Since infants have by now learned to distinguish their parents from other adults, they start to
use words such as “Mummy” and “Daddy”. They still practise speech sounds in their babbling
monologues, but the function of their babbling monologues change after the age of nine
months. They do not simply practise their speech sounds in a playful way, but are beginning
to babble and communicate with people and their environment. They will often shout to attract
attention or babble tunefully while repeating syllables such as ‘bab-bab’ or ‘dad-dad’ (Moog,
1976: 49).
26 Bühler, Charlotte. 1931. Kindheit und Jugend, Leipzig 1928.
27 Pech, K. Hören im optischen Zeitalter, 1969.

43
At nine to twelve months of age infants show significant development in their manipulative
skills. They are able to pick up small objects, feed themselves, recover toys which are out of
their reach and they learn to sit, pull themselves up, stand and walk (Moog, 1976: 50).
4.1.1.2 The Development of auditory perception in the infant phase
Weinberger points out that the mental abilities of infants failed to be appreciated up to the
middle of the twentieth century. Since infants lacked speech and spent so much time eating
and sleeping, the assumption was made that "not much cognition was going on inside the
infant's head". Research has proven, however, that infants have considerable musical abilities
from an early age. They are capable of perceiving the contour of a melody. This enables them
to perceive pitches rising and falling in a musical composition. They are able to recognise a
melody, even if it is played to them at different tempos. They have the ability to notice
changes in rhythm that would distort a musical composition immediately. These musical
perceptions, abilities and cognition of infants are regarded as similar to the manner in which
adults listen to and process music (Weinberger, 1999 [online]).
Infants are able to locate and anticipate where a sound will come from at a very early age. An
experiment conducted by Aronson and Rosenbloom (1971) found that eight infants of thirty
days old became apparently upset when they could see their mothers talking to them while
their voices came from another part of the room (Fong & Resnick, 1980: 103).
At the age of one-month, infants are able to respond to the ringing of a small bell by moving
their eyes and head towards the source of sound. When a person is speaking to a one-month-
old baby, the infant will turn his head to that particular person (Mackonochie, 1998:172).
According to Buhler and Hetzer (1935) 28 infants react positively to friendly tones of voice and
negatively to angry sounds (Fong & Resnick, 1980: 222).
Although babies seem to be passive between the ages of 1 and 3 months and do not respond
with much movement or sound, they need to be stimulated through all their senses. They are
absorbing all the sounds and actions around them and parents provide them with basic skills
28 Buhler, C. & Hetzer, H. Testing children's development from birth to school age. New York: Farrar and
Rinehart, 1935.
44
for communication and interaction by stimulating their senses and they surround them with the
correct learning environment (Senior & Hopkins, 1998: 63).
Activities that can be used at one month include:
• Controlling the infant's sound environment, since infants are startled and scared by
loud noises and surrounding the infant with friendly sounds and music and being
beware of music and sounds that are very loud, dramatic or that might sound "angry" to
the infant (Bazilchuk [s.a.][online]).
• The parent can gently shake a rattle or ring a small bell from different places a room.
The infant will then try to detect where the sound is coming from and will turn its head
and move its eyes towards the sound source.
• This activity can be repeated, but with the parent gently calling the infant by its name
from different places inside a room.
• Parents can hold their infants close and move and dance gently to the rhythm of music.
Different tempos of music can be played so that the infant can experience different
tempos of movement (Senior & Hopkins, 1998: 23).
These activities can be continued even with older babies.
At the age of two months infants will start to communicate with their parents by making cooing
noises, vowel sounds and gurgling sounds in their throats (Mackonochie, 1998:176).
At three months, infants start to smile at parents and coo whenever they see their caregivers.
They are now very aware of their bodies and will spend a lot of time playing with their hands
and kicking their legs and will even be able to hold a small toy for a few seconds
(Mackonochie, 1998:180,181).
At the age of three months infants are able to:
• distinguish between tonal and non-tonal sounds, pitches and timbres (tone colours)
(McDonald & Simons, 1989: 84);
• look for the source of sounds and be comforted by sounds and music that are soft and
rhythmic in nature (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 84);
45
• react positively to friendly tones of voice and negatively to angry sounds, according to
Buhler and Hetzer (1935) 29 (Fong & Resnick, 1980:222); and
• at the age of four to five months, start to turn towards the direction of a sound being
made (Fong & Resnick, 1980:103).
Suitable musical activities that the parent can use to enhance and develop these perceptions
are:
• Providing infants with toys that create interesting sounds

• Singing folk songs and chants to infants
• Providing musical and non-musical sounds and guiding the infant’s attention to the
source of sound
• Singing lullabies, rocking songs and rhythmic chants to the infant (McDonald &
Simons, 1989: 84). Gently rock, sway, dance or bounce the infant while singing these
rhythmic songs. Parents can hold infants on their laps while rocking them to a selection
of music or to a lullaby, nursery rhyme or any recorded song. Infants can be placed,
lying down, in a cloth and be swayed by their parents to the rhythm of a song or
selection of recorded music. Other rocking positions involve holding the baby in the
arms and letting the baby lie across the parent’s shoulders or to simply holding the
baby in the arms while swaying from side to side (Senior & Hopkins, 1998: 24).
According to Senior and Hopkins rocking movements are soothing, calming and
comforting. Rocking enables babies to develop a sense of rhythm, helps to form a
strong bond of trust and love between the mother and baby and enhances
communication between the mother and baby (Senior & Hopkins, 1998: 24).
• Small bells can be tied around the infants’ ankles so that the infant can listen to the
sound of the ringing bells when it kicks and moves its legs (Senior & Hopkins, 1998:
23).
• Bouncing games can be played with infants. Parents can bounce babies on their knees
or in their arms. Older babies can even be bounced on a bed or on a large ball.
Parents should sing songs about bouncing or suitable nursery rhymes while bouncing
29 Buhler, C. & Hetzer, H. Testing children's development from birth to school age. New York: Farrar and
Rinehart, 1935.
46
their babies. Bouncing is enjoyed by babies and helps them to develop a sense of
balance and rhythm, as well as an awareness of gravity (Senior & Hopkins, 1998: 25).
• Swinging activities can be done with older babies. Parents can hold babies under their
arms and gently swing them sideways, using slow movements. These swinging
movements will develop and encourage physical courage and confidence with babies,
as well as a sense of balance and spatial awareness. Such swinging movements can
be accompanied by rhythmic singing of a lullaby or by a recording of selected music
(Senior & Hopkins 1998: 24).
These activities are introduced to the baby with gentle care at a young age and should be
continued and repeated throughout the later stages of development. Even year-old toddlers
still love to be rocked, swayed and bounced. These games and movements can be played
and performed with more vigour and sometimes even be a bit on the wild side with older
toddlers. Older babies and toddlers enjoy these rougher games and movements.
At the age of six months, infants love to talk to themselves, laugh, chuckle, squeal out loud,
engage in vocal play with their voices by gurgling and cooing and will even scream when
annoyed and frustrated (Mackonochie, 1998:192).
At the age of six months, infants:
• are able to distinguish between tones of voice (happy voice, angry voice) and specific
speech sounds and
• love to “talk” to themselves and engage in vocal play with their voices by gurgling and
cooing (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 84).
Suitable activities that the parent can use to enhance and develop these abilities are:
• musical conversations with infants during care-giving tasks (singing a line of
conversation to the infant or singing and creating songs about the specific task being
performed at that moment)
• copying the pitches that the infant produces
• singing songs expressing different types of moods (happy songs and/or lullabies)
(McDonald & Simons, 1989: 84).
47
At the age of nine months, infants are able to:
• connect specific sounds with a person or object (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 84).
• enjoy listening to musical sounds and especially enjoy games such as "peek-a boo" or
simple music games and action songs such as Pat-a-cake (Mackonochie, 1998:
205,206).
• try to have conversations with people around them (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 84).
Their vocalisations are used to communicate or to show when they are annoyed
(Senior & Hopkins, 1998: 39)
Suitable activities that the parent can use to enhance and develop these skills are:
• Supplying infants with toys that produce different sounds. Focus the infant’s attention
on the source of sound.
• Listening with infants to a wide variety of music.
• Playing and initiating pitch-imitation games with the infants. Be creative and change
some of these “musical” conversations into songs (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 84).
At the age of twelve months, infants:
• love music and will respond to it by rhythmically moving their bodies (Senior & Hopkins,
1998: 39)
• are able to copy adults vocalisations
• respond to music rhythmically
• know their own names, as well as the names of other persons
• comprehend more than they are able to speak. Infants will try to follow and perform
verbal requests (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 84,85).
Music seems to be an essential, almost magical, element in the life of the young
child. By nature he seems to need music as part of his daily existence. He
listens in rapt fascination as his mother sings and rocks him. He experiments
with making vocal sounds long before he can talk. He enjoys tapping everything
he can in order to make sounds. He chants catchy rhyme or nonsense syllables
as he plays in the yard . . . (Greenberg, 1979: 5).
According to Müller-Zürich (1982: 28-29), music has the following benefits for infants:
48
• Music provides infants with the opportunity to stabilise their emotional life. Music can
be used to soothe, put infants to sleep, calm them when they are angry, create a
positive and pleasant atmosphere for their feeding times and while they are playing;
• Music serves as a basic medium for communication;
• Music serves as a medium for expression and provides infants with the opportunity to
express themselves through dance and movement;
• Music provides infants the opportunity for self-discovery, teaches them to socialise with
others and serves as a wonderful medium to canalise their tension and energy;
• Music contributes to regularity and order in the infant's life and satisfies some of the
basic needs of the infant;
• Rhythmic movement helps with the physical growth of the infant.
• Music strengthens the language acquisition of the infant. Through songs, language
patterns are learnt and the infant gets the opportunity to practise these patterns and
sounds through songs;
• Music accompanies and makes the infant’s daily life more pleasant (Müller-Zürich,
1982: 28-29).
Suitable musical activities that the parent can use to enhance and develop their child’s
experiences are:
• Sing and repeat songs to the infant. By doing this, the parent will build a wide
repertoire of songs that will become familiar through repetition;
• Physically demonstrate movements such as rocking, bouncing, swaying and moving
arms to the infant. These movements can be linked with suitable music. As an
example, the following movements can be linked with songs:
bouncing:
Afrikaans examples: Blink Vosperd (FAK Sangbundel 1979: 308, 309), Knietjie ry
(Kromhout 1970: 13) or the bouncing rhyme Kniespel (Opperman 1981:20).
English example: Trot, trot, trot (Nelson 1989: 125) and We're galloping on our
ponies (Nelson 1989: 79).
Xhosa example: Ihashe (The Horse) (Gunzberg 1987: 8).
49
rocking: lullabies such as

Afrikaans example: Slaap Kindjie Slaap (FAK Sangbundel 1979: 484).
English example: Rock-a-bye, Baby
(The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook 1996:14).
Xhosa example: Thula thul’ thula bhaba (Hush, hush, baby) (Gunzberg 1987: 8).
moving of arms:
Afrikaans example: Wielie Walie (FAK Sangbundel 1979: 434).
English example: I’m a little teapot (The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook 1996:
34).
Xhosa example: Nkwawu, nkwawu uhleli emthini (Monkey, monkey in the tree)
(Gunzberg 1987: 10).
swaying of arms:
Afrikaans example: Voetjie regs, with the second verse being “Swaai jou armpies/lyfi
eers links dan regs /heen en weer” ( FAK Sangbundel 1979: 456).
English example: See-saw and See-saw, Sacradown (Pitts et al. 1949: 30).
Xhosa example: Umzi watsha (The Homestead is burning) (Grassroots 1990: 17).
• The parent can personalise songs by inserting the child’s name or the name of any
other person of importance to the infant in the song
Afrikaans example: Wielie wielie walie, Nina sit op haar balie (FAK Sangbundel 1979:
434).
English example: Nina works with one hammer Nelson (1989: 51).
Xhosa example: We Sophie ulilela ntoni (Sophie, why are you crying?) (Gunzberg
1987: 43).
• Include action songs in which words give cues for actions in the infant’s repertoire.
Afrikaans example: Dansliedjie (FAK Sangbundel 1979: 437); Kom nou dans met my
(Addendum A: Lekkerluisterliedjies: Die Beste van Phyllis en maatjies Volume 1); Dit
is my huisie (Addendum A: 60 Beste Kinderliedjies Volume 1).
English example: Head and shoulders knees and toes (Nelson `989: 55).
Xhosa example: Intloko namagxa (Head, shoulders,...) (Gunzberg 1987: 11).
(McDonald & Simons, 1989: 84- 85).
4.1.1.3 The first musical experiences of the infant

50
The infant of a few weeks old reacts to sudden, loud noises with muscular contractions. These
movements are very similar to the movements that infants make when they are still in the
intra-uterine stage. Soft sounds or the voice of the mother will make infants restless and they
will start to exhibit searching movements, together with the instinct to suck. The infant's
reaction to musical sounds can only be observed at the time of the first smile (when they are
about five to six weeks old). Music no longer arouses them, but now has a calming effect.
Lullabies are considered to have a significant calming effect on infants and the effect is even
stronger when infants are rocked or cradled at the same time. Jerky and quick movements
can wake infants, whereas gentle swaying to and fro calms them. Newborn babies cannot
distinguish between differences in speed and therefore music lacks the dimensions of slow
and fast for them. High-pitched voices such as those of the mother or another sibling and
instruments that play in a higher frequency range, such as flute or music box seems to soothe
the infant (Moog, 1976: 50-51).
4.1.1.4 Active responses by the infant to musical stimuli
Infants respond actively to musical stimuli through motor movements, vocalising, musical
babbling and by displaying the first signs of the operation of their musical memory.
Parents have the important role of shaping the infants' early musical environment and can
present many activities and musical experiences to help infants to maximise their musical
responses and musical growth.
4.1.1.4 (i) General responses to musical stimuli
The first few months of the infant’s life are very calm and mostly comprise a state of
passiveness. The exact age at which the infant starts to respond actively to music differs from
one individual to another (Moog, 1976: 53-54).
At the age of six months, in exceptional cases as early as three months, infants' behaviour
changes significantly when they hear music. They are no longer calm and sleepy when they
hear music, but turn towards the source of sound with a facial expression of astonishment. In
some of the studies that have been conducted, infants were observed to turn to the mother
51
with “wide open questioning eyes”, give beaming smiles and look happily at the source of
sound. The pleasure that infants show when listening to music indicates that music can cause
an emotional experience even at such an early age. Infants may even stop the activity that
they engaged in and turn all their attention to the source of sound. At first infants, will be
happy to listen passively to the music, but will later become restless as they approach the
stage of listening actively to music (Moog, 1976: 53).
Research furthermore has proven that six-month-old infants do not give their attention to
music that has the greatest degree of intensity, or has the richest variety of rhythm. They will
ignore noisy sounds or sounds where speech is in the foreground and, in the case of the
latter, rather turn their attention to the sound itself. Children have been observed to respond to
music by selecting and turning their attention to the most beautiful and sensuous sound
(Moog, 1976: 55).
4.1.1.4 (ii) Earliest movements to musical stimuli
During the first few months, infants are content to simply look at or listen passively to things
around them. At the age of about six months, sometimes earlier, infants start to grasp small
objects and begin to respond to their environment through movement. They will first respond
to music by turning their attention actively towards the source of sound. After a few weeks,
they begin to respond to music with motor movements. These motor movements are very
clear and repetitive; the infant does not move in a restless or an unorganised way (Moog,
1976: 56).
The infant younger than one year responds rhythmically to music by demonstrating rhythmic
movements such as swaying, bouncing and rocking (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 75).
Typical movements include swaying and rocking to and fro or from side to side, as well as
bouncing up and down. These movements are influenced by the infant’s temperament or the
intensity of a particular experience and can sometimes be hesitant or even violent (Moog,
1976: 56).
In studies conducted by Moog, infants did not start to move immediately when they heard
music. A short pause was observed, during which infants listened attentively to the music
before they started to move. When infants were involved with a particular movement before
52
the music started, they would stop the movement they were doing, listen to the music
attentively and then respond to with a different kind of movement (Moog, 1976: 56).
Although the infant’s movements are repetitive, rhythmical and made in response to the sound
and rhythm of the music, they are not synchronised with the music. Moog concluded that the
age at which infants first start to move to music depends on the age at which they first start to
listen attentively to music. Thus, the earlier children begin to listen attentively and actively to
music, the earlier they will start to move to it. Vocalisations made by infants in response to
music only begin after motor movements in response to music are made (Moog, 1976: 58).
4.1.1.4 (iii) Earliest vocalising and musical babbling
Close investigation of the sounds that infants younger than ten days old made, indicated that
they were already using some of the vowel sounds that were needed for language. There are
eight sounds (five vowels and three consonants) that can be distinguished during the first few
days after birth.
The five vowels are:
• ae, as in bat (English) and ek (Afrikaans)

• i, as in bit (English) and vis (Afrikaans)
• e as in get (English) and bed (Afrikaans)
• u as in up (English) and appel (Afrikaans)
• u as in food (English) and broer (Afrikaans)
Most of these vowels sounds are formed in the front part of the infant’s mouth and tongue,
while the consonants are formed in the back of the mouth.
The three consonants are:
• h
• l
• glottal stop 30(t as in water or bottle)
30 Consonants can be formed as the result of breath being pressured behind the closed glottis (the opening
between the lower pair of vocal cords in the larynx).
53
At around four months of age the infant will start to produce back vowels and front consonants
during cooing. Cooing occurs when the cries and snorts of the infant are expressions of
contentment or pleasure or simply when the infant wants to play and exercise vocally (Fong &
Resnick, 1980: 220).
According to research done by Moog (1976: 59), infants first respond to music through
movements and later responds by making sounds. Two types of vocal response can be
distinguished: vocalisation and musical babbling. These vocal responses occur at
about six months of age and always come after the stages of pure listening and motor
responses (Moog, 1976: 61).
(a) Vocalisation
At this age infants use their voices in a playful manner. They try different sounds and enjoy
the process of playing with their voices (Fong & Resnick, 1980: 220).
Two types of vocalisation are used to express themselves and to show delight in sound.
• Chuckling and “crowing”: Infants express pleasure by chuckling and making “crowing”
vocalisations (Moog, 1976: 59).
• Babbling monologues: Infants use this type of vocalising to show that they have
enjoyed a piece of music. Babbling monologues can be used during or after the
performance of a piece of music by the infant. Most infants show surprise on hearing
music and depending on their temperament and their degree of courage can attempt to
reach the source of sound or keep a respectful distance from the source. Babbling
monologues are considered to be the precursors of speech and can begin as early as
the age of two or three months. Infants prepare their speech by practising speech
sounds. They begin with vowels and will proceed from the easiest to the more difficult
to articulate. Labial sounds follow and then dental sounds. The most difficult sounds of
all are the 'r’ and 'l’ and they are practised at the end of the babbling stage. During this
babbling stage, a few baby words can appear, such as 'dada’, 'nana’, 'mama’, 'ss’, or a
long drawn-out 'n’. At first, these words may relate to absolutely anything, but they
come to be related to and connected with specific people or things as the infant’s
speech develops (Moog, 1976: 59).
54
(b) Musical babbling: This term was first used by Georg Schuenemann 31 in 1930 to indicate
songs sung by infants and lacking in words. Musical babbling only occurs if music is played or
sung to the infant and it differs from speech babbling in that sounds and varied pitches are
produced and practised repetitively on one vowel or on a few syllables by the infant. Although
speech babbling precedes musical babbling, infants are able to sing their earliest babbling
songs before they can say their first word (Moog, 1976: 59-62).
According to Müller-Zürich (1982: 29) the characteristics of infants' earliest form of musical
vocalising and musical babbling:
• is primitive, elementary, monodical vocal music and consists of a system of sounds

and noises;
• is not bound to words, but does contain some vocalising of language and imitations of
environmental sounds;
• has a primitive, rhythmical tendency and is very expressive;
• lacks a fixed tonal system;
• is produced in a spontaneous and naive way and has an improvisational character;
• is solely the medium for communication;
• is individualistic, bound to the infant as individual and to the infant’s body, and is
regularly accompanied with gestures by the infant;
• does not necessarily involve an aesthetic goal (Müller-Zürich, 1982: 29).
Infants younger than six months are able to respond to differences in pitch. They can match
vocally sustained pitches and they start to imitate sounds around them. Suitable activities that
parents can use to help six-month-old infants with their melodic development are:
• singing to children in words or in neutral syllables like “loo” or “la”;

• imitating the sounds that infants are making;
• generating new sounds and ideas that infants can imitate.
31 Schuenemann, Georg. 1930. Musikerziehung I, Leipzig.

55
Infants aged six to eighteen months are able to differentiate between pitch contours and are
sensitive to phrase endings and intervals. Suitable activities that parents can use to help
infants with their melodic development are:
• continuing to play vocally with infants;

• singing simple nursery songs and other simple songs from the infant’s culture;
• playing recorded music to infants (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 108).
According to research that Gordon (1990) 32 and Gouzouasis (1992) 33 have conducted, the
young child’s early emergent singing abilities are related to the amount and quality of tonal
babbling experiences that the child receives as an infant. When young children lack the ability
to sing, this should therefore not be seen as indicative of low musical aptitude, but rather as a
limited amount of musical experience in their early years. Gordon furthermore believes that
children will learn to audiate earlier if they were more involved in tonal babbling. Audiation is
the ability to hear sounds internally after the sound is no longer present and is considered as
fundamental for overall musical behaviour and for children to be able to sing in tune. It is
important that musical instruction should remain informal, without any direct instructions or
required responses until children have emerged from their tonal babbling stage and are able
to sing a few phrases of song in tune (Szabo, 1999: 18,19).
4.1.1.4 (iv) Musical memory and the Infant
Before the age of nine months, infants listen passively to music and respond through motor
movements. Infants can only indicate their liking or disliking of music by enjoying pleasant
sounds and ignoring unpleasant sounds. By the age of nine months, infants start responding
through sound, which is called musical babbling, and will make their first attempt to talk. At
the age of nine months, infants are able to indicate displeasure or distaste on hearing music
and are able to indicate rejection by simply turning away from the source of sound. Some
infants may even pull a face or run away on hearing music they dislike. All these responses to
music indicate the beginning of the operation of memory (Moog, 1976: 63).
32 Gordon, E. 1990. A music learning theory for newborn and young children. Chicago: GIA Publications.
33 Gouzouasis, P. 1992. An organismic model of music learning for young children. Update: Applications of
Research in Music Education 11(1): 13-18.
56
Infants start to use their memory by repeating movements for a particular song that was
taught to them previously. By this time they are also able to perform the specific actions when
the song is sung or when the words of the song are rhythmically spoken to them (Moog, 1976:
64).
4.1.1.5 Activities and Musical Experiences for the Infant Phase
Greenberg (1979: 47) has stated that all children have the intrinsic ability to communicate and
react musically, but at their own level of development. He believes that children should be
exposed to a musical environment that is rich and full of variation. Providing and exposing
children to this stimulating kind of environment will maximise their potential and ability to grow
musically and to respond through music.
The parents have the important role of shaping infants' early musical environment and is even
referred to as the "taste maker in sound”. There are activities and musical experiences that
can be repeated and continued into the toddler phase and beyond.
Parents can:
• expand and broaden their own library of tapes and CDs. The more varied the parent’s
tastes become, the richer the child’s heritage will be. Adding beautiful recordings of
lullabies, folk tunes, country and western, jazz, blues and ethnic music can extend their
standard collection of classical music. This wide variety of music can help children to
develop an open ear and broad taste palette for music. Parents do not always need an
expensive CD collection for this. By simply turning on the radio (on the right stations),
children can be exposed to a wonderful variety of music (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 5-
6).
• control the baby’s sound environment by eliminating noise and loud sounds;
• chant and sing in an upper register to infants while touching or massaging the baby’s
limbs and sides. This activity will be enjoyed by infants and will furthermore help them
in mapping their bodies;
• sing nursery rhymes and/or folk music while bouncing the infant rhythmically on their
lap (Bazilchuk: [s.a.] [online]).
57
• provide children with vestibular input. According to Ayres (1983: 70), activities such as
jumping, running, swinging, spinning and touching things that vibrate provide a great
deal of vestibular input. Activities that are considered as a milder flow of vestibular
input are standing, walking and riding in a moving vehicle. The brain of the child will
sense and respond to this vestibular input long before visual and auditory inputs are
even processed. This vestibular input will provide infants with some of the building
blocks that are needed for the later development of their sight and hearing;
• sing infants’ favourite lullaby while gently rocking them backwards and forwards.
Rocking helps to develop gravitational security and is necessary for motor
development (Enoch [s.a.] [online]). Ayres (1983: 182) explains that gravitational
insecurity is the "abnormal anxiety and distress caused by inadequate modulation or
inhibition of sensations that arise when the gravity receptors of the vestibular system
are stimulated by head position or movement”. The receptors are single cells or groups
of cells that are sensitive to some type of sensory energy (Ayres 1983: 183). The
function of receptors is to transform the sensation into electric impulses and to send
these impulses across the sensory nerves towards the spinal chord and brain.
Interesting experiments with premature babies by Dr Mary Neal of the University of

Maryland School of Nursing have suggested that providing infants with an enriched
environment, as well as extra vestibular and tactile stimulation, has a positive effect
and influence on their development. A hammock was placed in the incubator and the
premature infant was rocked three times a day for half an hour. They found that the
babies who were rocked gained weight faster, showed a more improved muscle tone,
head movements, reaching and pulling movements, as well as auditory and visual
responses than the infants who received no rocking. In another experiment, premature
infants were given extra vestibular stimulation by being placed on a water bed in the
incubator. These infants gained weight faster, improved their sucking abilities, breathed
more regularly and showed improved motor co-ordination (Neal 1968: 1-5).
In a third experiment Dr Ruth Rice had mothers stroke, cuddle and massage their
premature infants for fifteen minutes, four times a day. These infants gained weight
faster, achieved better neurological and mental development than the other premature
infants (Rice 1977: 69-76). Dr Marlene Kramer has found that infants who receive extra
58
tactile stimulation are able to socialise better with others (Kramer, et al. 1975: 324-
334).
• engage in many face-to-face interactions with children and to play singing games with
them.
English example: See, see, see (Haines & Gerber1980: 66) and
Five little Piggies (Haines & Gerber1980: 44)
Afrikaans example: Duimpie Daan (Addendum A: 60 Gewildste Afrikaanse
Kinderliedjies Volume 1 CD).
Xhosa example: UNoli noli (Noli-the carpenter) (Gunzberg, 1987: 25)
It is important that these interactions should be undertaken in a way that is sensitive,

gentle and supportive of the child’s tolerance of movement, loud sounds and other
changes (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 95).
• rock, pat, touch and move with infants to the beat, rhythm patterns and melodic
direction of the music to which they are listening (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 60).
• hold infants in their arms and dance with them while gently changing direction. Infants
will love this activity and will associate it with security and closeness to the parent. It
simultaneously helps infants to integrate their visual and proprioceptive systems 34.
• talk “motherese” or infant-directed speech (talking and singing combined) to infants.

This will encourage infants to babble, which develops muscular control for speech
(Bazilchuk: [s.a]). The term “Motherese” is used to designate a specific type of
language that mothers use when communicating with their infants. Mothers talking
“motherese” to their infants use higher pitched sounds in their speech and tend to
pronounce their words carefully, slowly and repetitively. “Motherese” is considered as
the preverbal form of speech and plays an important role in the child’s verbal
development between the age of twelve months and five years (Szabo, 1999: 18).
• sing to children every day, no matter what their vocal abilities are.
34 According to Ayres (1983: 183) proprioception involves sensations that come from the muscles and joints.
Proprioceptive input informs the brain about how the muscles are contracting or stretching, as well as about how
and when the joints are bending, stretching, being pulled or compressed. All this information enables the brain to
know where every part of the body is situated and how they are moving.
59
• invent their own simple songs and rhymes to accompany them in their daily activities
and chores. They can make up their own rhyming nonsense sounds or use repetitive
words in a playful way. They can personalise songs by inventing new words to fit a
situation or add the infant's name in the song.
• perform rhythmic rhymes and nursery rhymes with infants. They can combine the
words and rhythms with gentle knee bounces and actions.
• allow children to explore rhythms and timbres by banging on pots and pans with
spoons.
• create times when both the parent and child can be silent and simply listen to the
sounds of nature around them. The parent can experience such quiet times by sitting
with the child beside a babbling brook and/or listening to birds chirping (Enoch [s.a.]
[online]).
• play musical games with infants. Examples of musical games are:
Pease Porridge Hot (The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook, 1996: 29),
Nose Blower (Andress, 1980:51),
One, two, three, four, five (Andress, 1980:52),
Pat-a-cake (Andress, 1980:52),
Rub-a-dub-dub (Andress, 1980:52),
Rub a Tummy (Andress, 1980:52),
See-saw, Margery Daw (The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook 1996: 15),
This little pig went to market (Wheeler, [s.a.]: 38),
Nose fun (Andress, 1980:53),
Shoe a little horse (Andress, 1980:52),
Bibble-dee Bobble-dee Boo (Andress, 1980:52),
Whistle Play (Andress, 1980:52).
• imitate sounds that infants make and initiate sound-imitation games. When parents
imitate infants’ sounds, infants will try to repeat parents' imitations of their sounds
60
(McDonald & Simons, 1989: 25). Parents should respect these sounds as the
beginning of communication.
• expose infants to a wide variety of sounds that can be made vocally, with their bodies,
and on instruments and sounds that are made in the environment around them.
• provide safe toys that produce musical sounds for infants to play with and to control
(Ponick, 1999: 33).
• create sound-producing toys for babies. They can place beans inside a clean, plastic
bottle with a secure cap. The infant can use this to create rattling sounds (Andress,
1980: 50).
• choose toys such as musical boxes and bells that are responsive to the child’s actions
• choose toys that have good sound quality and are accurate in imitating sounds and
instrumental sounds. Parents should be careful of toys that play out-of-tune songs or
produce a poor sound quality.
• buy instruments of a higher and better sound quality and try the local music shop for a
variety of better quality instruments.
Parents can use the following guidelines and suggestions when choosing recorded music for
infants:
• Choose pure and simple sound when choosing recorded music for babies, not music
with too much orchestration;
• Choose music that expresses serenity and happiness;
• Avoid heavy rock music, a booming bass and TV-commercial type music;
• Select music that is filled with contrasts and a variety of tonal and rhythmic patterns
and timbres. Good sources are folk and ethnic music;
• Jazz music is a good musical choice since it is full of variety, as well as rhythmically
and tonally stimulating. Avoid Jazz music that is too loud or frenetic.
• Parents should observe infants while playing music to them. Parents should try to
catch infants responding to the music. When infants respond positively to a specific
61
selection of music, parents are advised to keep repeating this music selection to the
child. Parents can indicate appreciation, smile, coo, bounce and clap for the infants'
enjoyment (Bazilchuk [s.a.][online]).
4.1.2 Musical development and experiences in the first half of the toddler phase
(twelve to twenty-four months)
During the first half of the toddler phase, toddlers of twelve to twenty-four months old respond
actively to musical stimuli through specific motor movements, coordinating their
movements with music, singing, as well as exhibiting a growing musical memory. Parents
can use many activities to help toddlers to develop all these skills.
4.1.2.1 General development and characteristics of the early toddler phase
An important event in the general development of toddlers occurs around the time around
their first birthday. Toddlers begin to learn how to walk and to talk. Learning to walk has
important consequences for the toddler. They learn how to master the co-ordination of their
limbs, to balance their bodies and see the world from an ever changing perspective. The
acquisition of language by toddlers has a great impact on their lives. Before their first birthday,
toddlers have been preparing for language through their babbling. The babbling words were
expressive and are later replaced by proper word forms. These words still present an
expression of the toddler’s feelings, moods, states of excitement or personal needs or wants.
The toddler is now also able to give names to people, objects and actions. This ability to name
and perceive objects in their environment is an important step out of the toddler’s egocentric 35
and narrow world of the self into the world outside (Moog, 1976: 66-67).
4.1.2.2 Active early responses by the early toddler to music stimuli
35 According to Fong and Resnick 1980: 167, preschool children are all characteristically egocentric. They
perceive situations or information only from their own point of view and are only able to notice one aspect of a
situation at a time. Egocentrism in this specific context does not imply that the child is selfish, but rather indicates
the child’s inability to surpass narrowed cognitive ability.
62
Toddlers respond to music stimuli by exhibiting specific types of movements, by coordinating

their movements with music, by singing babbling songs and imitating songs of others, as well
as by developing their musical memory.
4.1.2.2 (i) General responses to musical stimuli
In this phase, toddlers experience music more intensely and once they become aware of the
music, their attention cannot easily be drawn away from it. They now move in a larger and
stronger way in their response to music (Moog, 1976: 67). Campbell and Scott-Kassner (1995:
75) have found that toddlers between the age of one and two perform movements that are
dance-like and rhythmic and studies by Moog have concluded that the musical growth of
toddlers in this phase is to be observed in the variety of movements and not the number of
movements that the toddlers make (Moog, 1976: 70). The decrease in the number of
movements that toddlers make is due to the development of thought processes. In the
previous phase, toddlers' thinking was based on immediate perceptions, and memory images
could only be called up through actual, concrete perceptions. Toddlers were only able to hear
music and to respond to it through movements or singing, if the music was presented to them
as a direct, sensory experience (Moog, 1976: 70-71).
From fifteen to eighteen months, toddlers start to use "inner combinations" in their thinking.
"Inner combinations" are made when toddlers are able to remember and represent to
themselves specific relationships between things, without needing actual, concrete
perceptions to help them. Toddlers at his stage are able to internalise sound and actions in
their memory. Once they become involved in their thoughts with "inner combinations", they
can become so occupied with a memory image that they may choose to not respond to music
through movement and rather become involved with whatever they are currently thinking
about (Moog, 1976: 70-71).
4.1.2.2 (ii) Movements made by the early toddler to musical stimuli
The early movements of toddlers in response to musical stimuli are of different types.
63
(a) Types of movement
By the age of two, toddlers continue only three of the movements that are typical of infants
aged six months. These three movements involve rocking from side to side in a sitting
position, bouncing up and down by moving the spine, and "conducting". Toddlers now perform
conducting movements three times more than previously. They stand and sway from side to
side as well as backwards and forwards to music. When they are able to stand and walk well
enough, they will start to spin around to music. These movements are soon extended and
toddlers start to use space in their response to music. Toddlers will go round in a circle, turn
around when they walk, make regular dance and "stepping" movements, as well as odd
movements of parts of their bodies. These movements are repetitive and include the following:
• seesawing with one foot

• nodding the head
• swaying the head from side to side
• raising and lowering the heels
• moving the knees backwards and forwards
• swinging one leg backwards and forwards
• kneeling and rocking from one knee to the other
• opening and closing a hand regularly (Moog, 1976: 73).
But toddlers begin to move to music in a completely different way from the age of eighteen
months. Their movements are no longer performed on their own and they try to carry out their
dance movements with an adult, sibling or with a toy. This indicates the toddler’s natural
desire to carry out dance movements in the company of another person and can be seen as
the earliest sign of social behaviour in movement to music. Although infants younger than
twelve months enjoy being picked up, held close and danced with before they can walk, they
will not make these movements by themselves. In the infant phase, it is more about the
mingling of two desires: the desire to be rocked and the desire for physical contact with
another person (Moog, 1976: 73-74).
Moog (1976: 111) points out, though, that the movements that adults and toddlers make when
dancing with each other are non-communal. These movements sometimes do match each
64
other, but the reason for this is that the adults adapt their movements to those of the child.
Overall, the movements of the child and adult are completely different actions made by two
individuals at the same time.
(b) Co-ordination of music and movement
Before the age of eighteen months, toddlers experience difficulty in coordinating their
movements with the rhythm of the music. For example, when the music changes from a slow
to an obviously faster speed, they will make some kind of quicker movement, but unless the
toddler has exceptional musical talent, he or she will not be able to coordinate their
movements with the rhythm of the music. Between the ages of eighteen months and two
years, however, approximately ten per cent of toddlers begin to match their movements for
short stretches of time to the rhythm of music. The reason for their earlier difficulty is that
toddlers are unable to isolate the time element in the music that they hear. Toddlers first need
to develop some awareness of the duration of time before they can begin to co-ordinate two
opposite musical elements, such as the sound of music and the actions of dancing (Moog,
1976: 74).
4.1.2.2 (iii) Singing characteristics of the early toddler
The singing characteristics of twelve- to eighteen-month-old toddlers are that they love to play
vocally and experiment with sounds (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 46) and Campbell and Scott-
Kassner (1995: 75) have also shown that toddlers in this developmental stage tend to babble
in irregular rhythmic patterns. The eighteen-month-old toddler furthermore hums
spontaneously and sings short phrases of songs. When singing, the toddler's voice shows a
wide range of tone colour, pitch and intensity (Müller-Zürich 1982: 41).
At the age of nineteen months melodic and rhythmic patterns start to appear in toddlers’
vocalisations. Between nineteen and twenty-four months, they like to experiment freely with
songs and also enjoy singing and creating short, spontaneous songs, often consisting of small
melodic intervals with a flexible rhythm pattern (McDonald & Simons 1989: 46).
Types of songs sung by the early toddler comprise:
65
(a) Babbling Songs. The toddler between the age of twelve and twenty-four months
shows a distinctive increase in spontaneous singing. From the age of eighteen
months, they no longer sing short phrases only, but are able to sing longer songs.
Specific patterns and habits of singing that can be identified among toddlers involve
singing when they wake up in the morning, when playing with their toys, when running
around or going for a walk or before they go to bed. Many toddlers link their singing
with movements while others sing without making any movements.
In spontaneous singing, words are not normally used, but single words or parts of
words are sometimes strewn among a string of nonsense syllables. Periodically, a
babbling song will be started with a single word and then be continued with the
repetition of a single syllable.
In their first babbling songs, infants use microtonal figures (several intervals smaller
than a semitone), but toddlers now start to show development in their use of intervals.
The total effect now comes much closer to the diatonic system (Moog, 1976: 75).
Spontaneous singing and songs of toddlers are rhythmically very simple, due to the
child’s limited sense of time. These spontaneous songs are dominated by notes of two
lengths, and extra notes of different lengths occur occasionally. The toddler will also
use rests in between the individual phrases of a song. The lengths of these rests are
varied and depend on toddlers' breathing skills and the desire or need to sing more. It
must be noted that the simplicity of toddlers' spontaneous singing does not necessarily
imply that their songs are monotonous or uninteresting (Moog, 1976: 76).
(b) Songs imitating a sung model (“imitating songs“). Research by Moog noted that
toddlers as young as one year of age started imitating songs that were previously sung
to them by adults. He observed that toddlers would imitate and duplicate only the
words of songs sung to them and never the rhythms or pitch of the particular song.
Toddlers were furthermore only able to imitate speech for a limited amount of time.
They were especially attracted to words that had a distinctive and repetitive sound
pattern and enjoyed repeating these sounds and words. Examples of such sounds and
words are: mama, papa, dada, ding, dong (Moog, 1976: 77).
66
From the age of eighteen months, the songs toddlers imitate are quite short and they
are usually only able to sing a few bars at a time. Toddlers are only able to imitate and
sing a song after hearing it more than once. After hearing a song for the second time,
they will often begin to produce one or two indefinite sounds from it. After several
repetitions, the toddler will start to reproduce similar phrases. They will usually wait for
a song to be repeated before joining in and imitating the song. They experience the
repetition of a song as an indication and stimulus for joining in (Moog, 1976: 80).
The dominating effect and influence of words can be observed in the songs that
toddlers imitate. Such songs reveal more word co-ordination than melody or rhythm
imitation. Toddlers of eighteen months old are only able to keep the pitch or rhythm of
a song for about a bar, whereas the imitating words can be kept up for more than a bar
at a time (Moog, 1976: 80).
When imitating pitch in songs, toddlers tend to imitate only the direction of the melody.
Occasionally snatches of melody will be imitated and repeated, but with smaller
intervals than the original sung model. Toddlers are sometimes able to repeat exactly
the same pitch for as long as one bar when they sing and repeat the song with the
singer. By the age of two years, most toddlers are able to reproduce songs that sound
similar in words, pitch and rhythm to an original sung model. They are able to sing
parts of a song and sometimes even a whole song, but usually with mistakes. By this
stage their singing has developed from first imitating the words, then matching the
rhythm, to finally matching the pitch as well. Their former ability to imitate only a few
notes and fragments of notes at a time has developed into their being able to imitate
whole lines of songs and sometimes even the whole song (Moog, 1976: 82,83).
4.1.2.2 (iv) Musical memory and the early toddler

67
The ability of toddlers to imitate and recall songs that are sung to them and even coordinate
and repeat specific movements together with these songs, indicates that they are using and
developing their musical memory.
4.1.2.3 Activities for the first half of the toddler phase
It is important that parents remain involved with their children’s’ musical experiences through
the following activities:
• Parents should engage in many one-to-one and face-to-face activities with the toddler.
They should sing with the toddler, do finger play and action songs, and act out simple
stories and songs.
• Parents should respect toddlers' solitary and parallel play and provide them with many
opportunities for active, large muscle play. Rhythmic movements and action songs are
suitable for active, large muscle play (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 95).
4.1.3 Musical development and experiences in the second half of the toddler phase (two to
three years)
Two- to three-year-old toddlers respond actively to musical stimuli through their movements
and their spontaneous and imaginative singing and are developing their musical memory
through several activities, including singing pre-learnt songs. Toddlers in this phase exhibit
specific singing skills and need parents to provide them with activities and to guide them in
their musical experiences and musical growth.
4.1.3.1 General development and characteristics in the second half of the toddler phase
During this phase toddlers exhibit an increasing independence, as well as self-assertiveness.

They have become able to express themselves as individuals and this new development in
independence will often be accompanied by tantrums to show frustration.
Two-year-old toddlers are not able to observe themselves as separate from their environment
and are still discovering the boundary between themselves and the world that surrounds them.
68
They see objects and people as part of themselves and display behaviours such as jealousy,
restlessness, rebellion, malice, defending their own possessions, exerting a will of their own
and attempting to be taken notice of as they try to show their growing independence. Other
characteristics such as shyness, inhibition and self-consciousness, can emerge due to
toddlers' need for self-protection (Moog, 1976: 88).
Toddlers through their behaviour also begin to show emotional need and drive, the first signs
of being aware of the future. For example, desiring to possess an object indicates that the
child wants it now (present) for the future. An example that reveals how toddlers are able to
connect the past with the future occurs when someone has harmed or insulted them in the
past and they want to get even with that person (future). This awareness of past and future
enables toddlers to develop their ability to absorb and integrate musical sounds (Moog, 1976:
88-89).
4.1.3.2 The later toddler’s active responses to musical stimuli
Two-year-old toddlers begin to be able to sit still, relax and listen with rapt concentration and
attention to music. They have come to be able to forget about themselves and to become
completely absorbed in a musical experience, sitting still for up to five minutes and listening to
music, while ignoring any other stimuli, unless such stimuli present a very strong visual or
aural distraction. Toddlers will often choose to respond to music by sitting quietly and listening
to it, while at other times choosing to respond through movements and singing (Moog, 1976:
89).
4.1.3.2 (i) The later toddler’s movements made in response to musical stimuli
Since toddlers in this stage are able to concentrate for a longer period of time, they are often
unwilling to leave an activity once they have started it. During this phase of development
toddlers still respond to music through movement, but there is an overall decline in the
number and variety of movements made by them. However, toddlers are now more able to
coordinate their movements with music and an increase in the number of coordinated
movements with music can be perceived (Moog, 1976: 90). Toddlers are not always able to
keep in time completely when combining and coordinating their movements with music. They
begin by becoming able to keep time when they sing their own spontaneous songs, but with
69
the music that they hear. Although this type of self-co-ordination can sometimes be observed
in toddlers as young as eighteen months of age, the majority of children between the age of
two and four years are able to coordinate their singing with rhythmically matching movements
for a short duration of time, then gradually develop this skill into longer durations of time
(Moog, 1976: 91).
Children between the age of two and three exhibit an astounding variety of movements. They
will often sway backwards and forwards, rock sideways, jump up and down, sway their feet
and perform other "conducting" movements with parts of their bodies. Children enjoy clapping
their hands, tapping their knees and moving objects that they hold in their hands. They also
start to show major development in their use of space when they move to music. Children will
often use stepping movements, create circles as they move around, perform proper dance
turns and will often dance themselves “into a state of ecstasy” by turning faster and faster in
smaller circles (Moog, 1976: 93,94).
Toddlers after the age of two and a half still enjoy dancing with an adult and will decide by
themselves to join in the dance. In the previous phase of development, the actions and
movements of toddlers simply happened and were uncontrolled. In this phase, toddlers try to
control their movements and will interact with adults. They respond to the demands of the
music played to them, as well as to the individual that they are dancing with (Moog, 1976:
111).
4.1.3.2 (ii) The singing characteristics of the later toddler
The singing characteristics of two-year-old toddlers are that they start to use melodic patterns
from learned songs in their spontaneous singing and are able to sing parts of songs
(McDonald & Simons 1989: 46). Müller-Zürich’s research confirms that two-year-old toddlers
are able to sing phrases of songs and that their singing is done spontaneously while they are
playing. The pitch that toddlers sing is, however, still unstable (Müller-Zürich 1989: 41).
Toddlers between the age of two-and-a-half and three years continue to imitate songs,
although they rarely sing with total accuracy (McDonald & Simons 1989: 46). They enjoy
singing short, simple songs, playing group singing games and improvising spontaneously on a
70
minor third interval. An example of the minor third interval or teasing tune in Afrikaans is the
singing of “wêla-ka-pêla” (Müller-Zürich 1982: 41).
(a) Types of songs sung by the later toddler
• Spontaneous and Imaginative Singing: Toddlers in this later phase of development still
enjoy singing spontaneous songs and will continue doing so as long as their singing
continues to amuse and interest them. Before the age of eighteen months, toddlers
only sing spontaneous songs for a very short while, but from the age of eighteen
months onwards they start to sing spontaneously for longer periods of time. Research
conducted by Moog showed that toddlers during this phase sang spontaneously for up
to four minutes at a time. Examining the spontaneous songs of toddlers revealed that
these songs were often sung on only one vowel or syllable, hummed to a “m-” or ”ng-”
sound and that a whole word would occasionally be used and repeated in their singing.
These spontaneous, nonsense songs usually make no sense and are simply sung by
toddlers for their own entertainment and pleasure. When singing their spontaneous
songs, toddlers do not expect a vocal reply from adults. They are, however, happy and
delighted when they are praised for their singing and spontaneous songs (Moog, 1976:
95).
• Pre-learnt songs. Toddlers between the ages of two and three are able to imitate and
sing parts of songs that were previously sung to them. Initially they are only able to
imitate the sound of words successfully, but later start to imitate the rhythm of words.
By the age of three, most toddlers are able to sing and imitate songs with the accurate
words, rhythm and pitch. The number of toddlers who are able to sing whole songs
instead of fragments of songs also increases. Toddlers experience difficulty in imitating
pitch accurately, though, and tend to follow the direction of the melody (Moog, 1976:
96).
• Mixed form or “Pot-Pourri” songs. An interesting new form of singing develops during
this phase. Toddlers still sing spontaneously but start to use fragments of words and
71
melodies of songs that they have heard and learnt previously. They start to combine
their existing musical experiences with vocal improvisations and the end result is mixed
songs with an original melody and bits of a previously learnt song. Moog refers to these
songs as “pot-pourri songs” (Moog, 1976: 100).
(b) Singing skills of the two-year-old toddler
Research was conducted by Moog to examine the vocal range used by toddlers between the
ages of two and three. He specifically analysed the spontaneous songs of toddlers, since
these songs gave toddlers the choice to decide how low or high they wanted to sing. He found
that the lowest note that the toddlers could sing was A-flat below middle C and that the
highest note was the G-sharp above middle C. The specific cases that Moog examined
furthermore indicated that the toddlers adopted the vocal range of their mothers in every
instance (Moog, 1976: 100).
Toddlers between the age of two and three are able to imitate the words of songs, the rhythm
of songs, as well as the pitch of songs. They tend to imitate the direction of the melodies when
singing and are able to sing groups of notes accurately according to pitch and rhythm (Moog,
1976: 99).
4.1.3.2 (iii) Activities and musical experiences for the second half of the toddler phase
The position statements and the setting of national standards by MENC (Music Educators
National Conference) require toddlers between the ages of two and four to be surrounded with
a rich and stimulating music environment. Toddlers need to be exposed to a wide variety of
sound sources, as well as good quality recorded music. Toddlers need to be taught a wide
selection of songs, as well as be given opportunities where they can improvise and sing freely.
Children at this age do not perform very well together as a group, therefore individual music
experiences should be planned and given to them and they should not be pressured into
performing with peers as a unit (MENC1992 [online]).
The following musical activities and experiences ought to be provided for the two- to three-
year-old toddler.
The parent can:
72
• encourage and provide opportunities for the toddler to sing and improvise songs in a
free, improvised style while playing (performing and creating) (McDonald & Simons,
1989: 61);
• encourage the toddler to sing folk songs and composed songs with others. This singing
may not always be on pitch or in time with others (performing) (McDonald & Simons,
1989: 61). Toddlers should be taught songs that are simple, but vary in key, metrum,
genres and musical styles (MENC 1992 [online]);
• play freely on simple rhythm instruments and explore and experiment with the sounds
of these instruments, as well as other sources from the environment around them
(performing and creating) (MENC(b)[s.a.] [online]);
• encourage the child to perform movements such as walking, running, jumping,
galloping, clapping and “freezing.” The parent can respond with sound to the child’s
movements by imitating the movement on a percussion instrument such as a
tambourine or drum (performing) (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 61);
• help toddlers to create their own songs that they can use to accompany their play
activities. Toddlers should be given opportunities for creating their own, simple
accompaniment to songs, as well as creating original, short pieces of vocal and
instrumental music. Toddlers can be allowed and encouraged to create their own,
unique graphic or symbolic music system and to use this unique system to show
visually how they experience and hear vocal and instrumental sounds and other music
ideas (MENC (b)[s.a.] [online]);
• show the toddler printed music and label it as music (reading);
• encourage the toddler to explore the expressive possibilities of his/her voice. The
parent can initiate sound-imitation games with the toddler (creating) and encourage
toddlers to use their voices in an expressive manner when speaking, chanting and
singing (MENC(b)[s.a.] [online]);
• encourage and provide opportunities for the toddler to listen attentively to a selected
repertoire of music. Encourage the toddler to move spontaneously to a wide variety of
music;
• sing frequently to the toddler so that he or she can learn to distinguish between singing
and speaking. Toddlers will only emerge from their musical babbling stage when they
are able to distinguish between singing and speaking;
73
• demonstrate the awareness of sound and silence through movement and “freezing”
when the music has stopped (auditive awareness);
• improvise movements with the toddler to indicate an awareness of beat, tempo, and
pitch;
An example illustrating beat: Let the toddler bang on a drum or tambourine with every
step he/she takes. Then ask the toddler to sing his or her favourite marching song and
to combine his or her singing while walking around and banging on the drum.
An example illustrating pitch: Ask the toddler to close his or her eyes while the parent
plays high-pitched notes on the piano. When the sounds are high, the child has to
pretend he or she is a bird that flies high in the sky. When the notes are low, the child
can pretend to be ant or worm that crawls low on the ground.
An example illustrating tempo: The parent can choose music that illustrates two
contrasting tempos. The “Carnival of Animals” by Camille Saint-Saëns is a very good
example for teaching this concept. The parent can ask the child to listen to the music
and then to run or gallop as fast as a horse or walk as slowly as a tortoise. The child
has to combine his or her movements with the music (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 61).
4.1.4 Musical development and experiences in the preschool phase

(three to four years)
Three to four-year-old toddlers respond actively to musical stimuli through their movements
and their spontaneous and imaginative singing. They are developing their musical
memory through several activities, including singing pre-learnt songs. Toddlers in this phase
exhibit specific singing skills, as well as observable musical behaviours and need parents
to provide them with activities and to guide them in their musical experiences and musical
growth.
4.1.4.1 General development and characteristics of the preschool phase
Three is a nodal age, a kind of coming of age (Gesell & Frances, [s.a.]: 55).
74
During this phase of development, young preschoolers' general behaviour improves, so that
they are not as aggressive as before. Children between the ages of three and four are able to
separate themselves from what they observe and become more objective in their perceptions.
In this phase, they exhibit spontaneous and lively fantasies and will often create imaginary
friends and make-believe people. The desire for fantasies or magic can be regarded as the
child’s effort to explain and master their important world of reality (Moog, 1976: 107).
Another sign of development is that children have become willing to adapt and conform to
acceptable social behaviour. They are able to play with others, show fondness and concern
toward younger siblings and understand the sharing of toys. They enjoy the company of
others and will often play in parallel with other children. During parallel play children play
alongside each other and basically imitate each other. This development in social skills and
their newly gained consciousness of reality makes children in this phase much easier to
handle and manage at home (Moog, 1976: 108).
4.1.4.2. Active responses to musical stimuli in the preschool phase
The number of active responses involving singing and movements that toddlers exhibit when
there is musical stimulus keeps declining between their third and fourth year. Their response
to music in this phase involves sitting quietly and concentrating on the music (Moog, 1976:
108).
Three-year-old preschoolers enjoy handling and playing with instruments, are especially
interested in the tone colours (timbre) of the instruments and enjoy experimenting with
different instruments. At this age children are very interested in the working of an instrument
and in stories about songs and they are able to sit and listen to music for short periods of time
(Müller-Zürich, 1982: 46).
4.1.4.2 (i) Movements made by the preschooler to musical stimuli
The studies conducted by Moog (1976: 109) indicated that, besides the decline in the number
of active responses, there furthermore was no increase in children’s co-ordination between
music and their movements. There was an increase in the variety of movements made by
75
children in this phase, though. The children he studied showed a wide variety and combination
of motor movements when they danced or moved to music. Movements such as stepping,
running, turning, curtseys, head nodding and arm swinging were observed. The children
furthermore preferred dancing on their own, but a few children enjoyed dancing with a partner
or a toy (Moog, 1976: 109).
Müller-Zürich (1982: 46) has found that three-year-old preschoolers are able to perform
rhythmic movements and dances that include movements such as walking, running and
skipping. They also enjoy wearing costumes that suit the content and words of their songs.
It is clear that three-year-olds enjoy moving certain parts of their bodies, such as rocking their
feet, moving their mouths rhythmically, nodding their heads, rocking their heads sideways,
circling and swinging their opened arms, pretending to beat a drum and clapping their hands
(Moog, 1976: 112).
Moog (1976: 113) suggests that preschoolers aged between three and four are starting to
reflect their different home environments and the effect of these environments in the field of
music. Children whose parents have taught them songs and games show a distinctive
advantage over children who had no exposure to music in the home environment.
4.1.4.2 (ii) Singing and the preschooler
Three-year-old preschoolers enjoy using their voices, especially in singing. They use their
voices and music as a medium to communicate and to express themselves. The following
features and singing skills can be identified in the music of three-year-old preschoolers:
• Children are able to sing songs as a whole without making any mistakes (sometimes
even earlier than the age of three).
• Children enjoy improvising and creating their own melodies and are able to recognise
melodies that are sung and played to them.
• Children enjoy singing with others, but still prefer solo singing (Müller-Zürich, 1982: 46).
(a) Spontaneous and imaginative singing

76
At the age of three, toddlers enjoy singing spontaneous songs and exhibit a feeling for metre
and regularly returning rhythmic patterns (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 75).
Children of this age are starting to create different kinds of spontaneous songs as the result of
them being intellectually active. While children previously sang songs that were spontaneous
and imitative, a third and new type of singing emerges now. This new kind of singing,
imaginative singing, occurs when children sing spontaneously but combine snatches of songs
they already know or create new versions of old songs. Some of their spontaneous songs may
not resemble any well-known song and they may tend to hum or sing a single syllable while
listening to a record or radio. Another type of singing that they now begin to expand is the
“Pot-Pourri” song. With this kind of song, children create new songs by adding together bits
and pieces of songs that they know. They tend to mix words, melodic lines and rhythms,
combining them with a few of their own original ideas. Narrative songs that children sing at
this age also start to show some development. In this type of singing, children sing any words
as long as it sounds as though they are singing or telling a story. When children are not able
to find suitable words for their stories and monologues, they use nonsense words to join all
the ideas together (Moog, 1976: 114, 115).
(b) Pre-learnt songs and the singing skills of the three-year-old

Studies conducted by Moog also showed that children would first copy songs by imitating the
words of the song being sung to them. After having mastered the words, they would start to
copy the rhythm and pitch of these songs. He concluded that children, when imitating songs
rhythmically and on pitch, initially without using the words, were most likely able to sing
correctly most of the time at the ages of three and four. He furthermore found that all the
children who had the largest repertoire of songs, came from homes where the parents sang to
them on a regular basis. According to Moog, nursery schools play a very important role in
teaching and exposing children to a wide repertoire of songs. According to him, many children
owe their whole song repertoire entirely to the exposure that they receive in the nursery
school (Moog, 1976: 119).
4.1.4.3 Observable musical behaviours of the three-year-old preschooler

77
Three-year-old preschoolers are able to use their musical imagination without limiting
themselves to being objective. They are able to use figures, rhythms and sounds and to
arrange these in any particular order, whether it sounds musical or not. Children are very free
when they experiment with music but are not able to really create true and original music. At
this age, they furthermore show an intense desire to perform singing and round games. They
keep up these games for a very long time and enjoy the added benefit of adding movement to
their singing (Moog, 1976: 120, 121).
Preschoolers of this age furthermore exhibit the following characteristics:
• They are becoming more aware of the variety of different sounds that they hear around
them, as well as of different sounds in music.
• They are able to find and trace sounds around them better than before and are curious
about all the different sounds and sound timbres that they hear.
• Although they have a wider musical vocabulary than before, they still experience
difficulty and have limitations when it comes to classifying and organising sounds into
groups.
• They are able to hear and recognise similarities and differences in sounds and are
even able to hear this without a visual clue.
• They are becoming more sociable when it comes to singing. They may decide on their
own to join a group action song, but will mostly just listen, follow the movement
instructions and will occasionally join in song making (Andress, 1980: 149).
4.1.4.4 Activities for this phase
• The musical activities and experiences that were used for the two- and three-year-old
toddler can also be used for toddlers of this age.
• Opportunities should be provided for children to listen to different musical and
environmental sounds and to identify these sounds verbally. Children can be asked by
their teacher or caregiver to describe these sounds or music. If they have difficulty with
expression or finding words, the teacher can assist them with other descriptive or
78
musical words that could suit their own experiences of the sounds. By doing this, the
teacher helps children to expand their musical vocabulary.
• Children should be exposed to many action songs and singing games. This will
encourage them to participate and interact with their peers.
• Music that children can move to freely, or around which they can create their own
fantasies, should be played. Children should be allowed to listen to the music and then
to move around according to their own interpretation of the music. After the children
have listened to a selection of music, teachers or parents could ask them to describe
the music to them verbally. Aspects such as the mood of the piece (happy, sad, scary),
tempo (fast, slow) and timbre (warm, deep sound or high, like a bird) can then be
discussed and later expressed through movement or through a character (the child
becomes a butterfly, fairy, giant, crocodile, etc) (Author’s suggestion).
4.1.5 Musical development and experiences of the preschool child (four to six years)
Four- to six-year-old toddlers respond actively to musical stimuli through their movements
and their singing. Toddlers in this phase exhibit specific, observable musical behaviours
and need parents to provide them with activities and to guide their musical experiences and
musical growth.
4.1.5.1 General development and characteristics of the preschool phase (four to six years)
Between the ages of four and six, children develop peacefully and calmly. They observe and
experience the world around them with increased energy through their senses. They do not
gaze or listen passively all the time but are able to concentrate and pay attention for longer
periods of time. Behaving become more focused and attentive to what they observe, they can
adapt their behaviour to a situation and behave in a reasonable manner. Their ability to think
logically is improving and they have become able to recognise parallels between cause and
effect. Children at this age are conscious of time and by the age of five understand how a
clock is related to their daily activities (Moog, 1976: 123).
The increased ability to think logically enables children to perceive their world and
environment in a more objective manner. They are still very imaginative at this age, have a
79
vivid fantasy life and love fairy tales and stories where they can mix fantasy and reality, but
they are also very concerned with the well-being and happiness of other people and will often
incorporate the good and bad luck of people in their fantasy stories (Moog, 1976: 124).
4.1.5.2 Movements and the preschooler
Preschoolers aged four to six exhibit different levels of development in their spontaneous
movements. Previously, children’s rhythmic response to music would involve their whole
bodies. In this new phase of their development, they respond with parts of their bodies only
and these movements are often observed as being much weaker and sometimes even
inconspicuous (Moog, 1976: 125).
The rhythmic development of preschoolers between the ages of four and five reveal an ability
to tap in time to a regular set pulse. They are also able to perform elementary ballet steps and
movements (Müller-Zürich, 1982: 47). They are able to imitate short rhythmic patterns on
instruments and start to develop rhythmic skills such as clapping and patting.
Preschoolers aged six to seven are able to distinguish between fast and slow, long and short
rhythms and are able to perform rhythms and songs in faster or slower manner (Campbell &
Scott-Kassner, 1995: 75). At the age of six, they are able to selectively move only parts of
their bodies (Moog, 1976: 125). While they hardly used clapping before the age of five, they
use it as the most frequent form of movement at the age of six. Moog (1976: 126) concludes
that clapping movements are a learnt response and that children learn this movement through
all the singing games that they do.
4.1.5.3 Singing and the preschooler
The singing characteristics of the four-year-old preschooler involve following a sequence while
learning songs. They are able to follow, imitate and remember words, rhythm, phrases and a
melodic contour. At five and up to five-and-a-half-years of age, preschoolers can sing most of
the songs that have been learnt fairly accurately and the sense of key has been stabilised
The features and singing skills that can be identified in the music of four-year-old
80
Preschoolers are as follows:

• they show growth in the control of their voices during singing;
• they enjoy both solo and group singing;
• they enjoy playing and dramatising simple singing games;
• they use and improvise on the minor third interval while they are playing or when they
are calling or teasing someone (Afrikaans children love to sing and tease someone
with “Wêla-ka-pêla”);
• they love experimenting with instruments and start adding two or more tones together;
• they are able to sit and listen to music for longer periods of time. The preschooler also
enjoys pointing out well-known melodies and songs (Müller-Zürich. 1982: 47).
The music that the preschooler creates and produces, both vocally and instrumentally, has the
following features:
• It is simple, sober, unaccompanied, ordered, monodical vocal and instrumental music.

This music is structured in short, balanced phrases and sentences;
• The music is primarily bound by words, but humming and cantus do occur;
• The music has a strong rhythmical element, regular bars, logical construction and fixed
tonal systems;
• The music is expressive and has a romantic-fantasy character;
• The music is produced spontaneously and is learnt formally. A certain degree of
technical competence is required;
• Music is used by the preschooler as a medium to express himself/herself;
• The playing of music is individualistic, but group playing does occur;
• The music has an aesthetic as well as an entertaining purpose (Müller-Zürich, 1982:
48).
4.1.5.4 Activities and music experiences for this phase
Four- and five-year-old children are becoming socially conscious and appropriate music-
making experiences such as singing, playing singing games and playing instruments should
be included in their activities. Provide many opportunities for children to explore their own
voices, bodies, nature and instrumental sounds individually. Movement is considered the most
effective means for children of this age to describe their music experiences. The child loves to
81
play with ideas, movements, language and sounds. Musical activities and experiences such
as those that follow, which allow opportunities for the child to explore freely, ought to be
provided for four-and five-year old preschoolers;
Parents can:
• encourage preschoolers to use their singing voices and to distinguish between their
speaking and singing voices;
• sing several pitches and songs to preschoolers and encourage them to match the
vocal pitches being sung to them. Children should be able to match these pitches and
sing in tune within their own range most of the time;
• play a variety of music to preschoolers so that they can demonstrate their awareness
of beat, tempo (fast-slow), dynamics (loud-soft) and pitch (high-low) through
movement and through playing instruments;
• teach and sing nonsense songs, folk songs, and song games to preschoolers;
• create and use pictures, geometric shapes, and other symbols to represent and
demonstrate pitch, dynamics, tempo and simple forms to children.
Examples of pitch through pictures: bird - high pitch; ant - low pitch
Examples of dynamics through pictures: elephant - loud; mouse - soft
Examples of tempo through pictures: horse - fast; tortoise - slow
Example of simple forms through geometric shapes: Use a triangular shape and a
circular shape to show when a piece of music has contrasting or repeating sections, for
example: “Twinkle Little Star” - ABA form. The A parts are the repeating sections and
the B part is the contrasting section.
• encourage preschoolers to explore and improvise sound patterns on instruments such

as the xylophone. Preschoolers ought to be provided with opportunities for self-
expression. Playing instruments and singing on their own provide children with an
opportunity to express themselves through a medium that is playful and pleasurable.
To play an instrument requires self-control, discipline and obedience;
• encourage children to improvise and perform songs spontaneously during a play

activity;
82
• allow children to complete “answers” to an unfinished melodic phrase by either singing

or playing the answer on an instrument. For example: parents could start with well-
known songs and sing or play only the first line of the song. The child should then
complete the song by singing or playing. Parents can furthermore improvise their own
melodic phrases and let the child complete it by singing or playing the “answer".
• play a game in which children have to express an idea or a mood by only using
instruments, environmental or body sounds. Parents can join in the game through
guessing the mood or idea being expressed by their children;
• provide opportunities for children to listen attentively to short selections of music.

Listening to music attentively requires self-control and concentration, and these
aspects can be developed in an enjoyable manner through music.
• provide children with an expanded repertoire of music;
• encourage children to respond to musical elements (for example: pitch, duration,

loudness and musical styles such as marches or lullabies) through movement or
through playing an instrument;
• encourage children to describe the differences and similarities in music through

movement or language. For example: fast-slow, up-down-same, smooth-jumpy, short-
long, similar-contrasting;
• teach and help children to classify instruments by shape, size, pitch and tone quality;
An example of classifying by shape: The members of the string family all have the
same shape (violin, cello, double bass)
An example of classifying by pitch: The piccolo and violin can both produce high
pitches like a bird.
An example of classifying by size: The double-bass and tuba are the biggest
instruments in their own families.
Encourage children to use a simple vocabulary of music terms to describe sounds

(McDonald & Simons, 1989: 61-62).
4.2 The structural elements of music

83
According to Grobler (1990: 39), the structural content of music can only be heard and defined
by means of sound. Music and sound are closely related and always go together hand in
hand. Musical sound is also referred to as tone and every musical sound or tone comprises
different aspects, such as duration, pitch, intensity and volume (Grobler 1990: 39).
Since all kinds of music have common properties or elements such as: timbre, dynamics,
rhythm, melody, form, texture and harmony, one of the goals in music education is to guide
young children to develop age-appropriate concepts about music and all its elements. These
basic concepts concerning music provide children with a foundation for learning about music.
Once these concepts have been developed and the elements of music are understood, it
helps us to respond to music more fully and makes it easier to think about what we have
experienced (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 80).
Elementary concepts and ideas about sound and tone that are formed during the preschool
years are:
• Every sound has a degree of intensity;

• Each sound lasts for a certain duration of time;
• Each sound is created at a certain pitch;
• Each sound has a volume of its own;
• Each sound has a sound quality of its own (Grobler, 1990: 39).
Other concepts concerning sounds that are formed are about the classification of the origin of
a specific sound. Sounds can be identified and categorised into the following specific groups:
• Sounds which are created by the voice (vocal sounds);

• Sounds that are unusual or unconventional and are made by elements in nature and
the environment, such as glass, paper, wood and metal (unconventional sounds).
• Sounds that are created by using one’s body, such as clapping or the stamping of feet
(body percussion sounds);
• Sounds that are made by traditional instruments, such as melodic and non-melodic
instruments, stringed instruments and wind instruments (traditional instrumental
sounds);
84
• Sounds that are created by using electronic equipment (electronic sounds) (Grobler
1990: 40).
Concepts concerning music cannot be taught in an abstract way, but must be acquired
through meaningful, musical experiences. The structural elements and concepts of music and
sound are understood and acquired in a specific order. The understanding of timbre and
dynamics occurs before the conceptualisation of rhythm and melody. The last concepts that
children acquire and comprehend through musical experiences are form and harmony
4.2.1 Timbre
Timbre, according to Andress (1980: 183), is "the distinctive characteristic and quality of a
specific sound". Pitches that are the same can be given a different expressive feeling when it
is played or sung by different instruments or voices. Tone colour or timbre can be changed
and the expressive quality of music influenced by changing the tone production of individual
instruments, as well as by combining all these different tone colours in various ways
(Bergethon et al., 1986: 7).
There are basic concepts concerning timbre (tone colour) that are of importance and that can
be taught and experienced by children.
• The unique qualities of sounds are determined by the type of voice or instrument that
produces the sound;
• A voice or musical instrument can be distinctively recognised and identified by their
characteristic sound;
• The quality of sound (timbre or tone colour) of instruments or voices can be different
when the instruments or voices are used and played in a different way (McDonald &
Simons, 1989: 80).
A variety of active listening activities can be used to help focus the child’s attention on
different aspects of music. The following activities will help the child to focus and identify tone
colour in music:
85
• The child can be introduced to individual instruments, for example, guitar, recorder,
piano, tambourine, triangle, et cetera, by demonstrating them to the child. The child
can be given the opportunity to handle and play these instruments;
• Parents can play games with children in which they, for example, have to raise their
hands when they hear the guitar or tap on their heads when they hear the piano;
• Children can be allowed to listen to a piece of music and pretend that they are the
musicians playing specific instruments. The child can then use specific movements to
show how he or she hears, identifies and “plays” a particular instrument;
• Older children can be asked to clap the rhythmic pattern that the drum plays in a
selection of music;
• A selection of music in which female and male voices are singing can be chosen. The
child could be asked to sing with the female voice only and to listen to the male voice;
• The child can be given a chart with pictures of instruments and be asked to circle the
instruments that he or she hears in a specific piece of music. This activity can be extended by
allowing children to cut out the pictures of the instruments they have heard and list them in the
order that they were heard (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 163).
4.2.2 Dynamics
Dynamics, according to Andress (1980: 183), are "the changing loudness or softness of a
sound; [which] changes may occur gradually or suddenly".
According to Grobler (1990: 40), dynamics relate to the expressive element of music and
indicate the intensity of sound (for example, how loudly or softly the notes in a piece of music
should be played). The degree of intensity can vary from gradually louder or softer (crescendo
and decrescendo) or abrupt and sudden changes from loud to soft and vice versa.
86
There are basic concepts concerning dynamics that are of importance and that can be taught
and experienced by children:
• Musical sounds can be loud or soft;

• Musical sounds may become louder or softer. This change can happen gradually or
suddenly;
• A sudden loud sound can give a person a fright. Accentuated notes can change a
person’s interpretation of a movement (Grobler, 1990: 40)
• The mood of a song or composition depends upon the level and changes in the
dynamics that the performer produces (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 81).
Active listening activities can be used to focus the child’s attention on the concept of dynamics
in music:
• Parents can choose to play loudly and softly on an instrument, for example, piano,
recorder or tambourine. Children can then be asked to move while the parent plays the
instrument and to show with their bodies when they hear the instrument playing louder
or softer. The parent could start by suggesting movements such as walking on tiptoe
when the music is soft and stamping the feet loudly when the music is loud. Once they
understand this activity (loud/soft concept), children will create their own movements.
• Parents could play a steady beat on a drum accentuate a certain pulse, for example 1
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4. The child can then be asked to walk to the steady beat and to
show dynamic accents by stamping his or her foot on the accent. The parent can
strengthen the dynamic accents auditively by tying sleigh bells around the child’s
ankles. Every time the child stamps his or her foot to an accent, the bells will ring and
emphasise the accent. Children can be allowed to create and use any other angular or
sharp movements to show that they hear a dynamic accent.
• Children can also be asked to play the dynamic accents they hear on a rhythm
instrument or to clap the accents.
• Parents can play a crescendo or decrescendo on an instrument and ask children to

demonstrate what they hear through movement. “In the hall of the Mountain King” by
Grieg provides a good selection of music to demonstrate crescendo. Parents can
create their own stories where crescendos and decrescendos are used, for example
87
that a train is approaching the train station and the child can vocally and physically
imitate the soft rumble of wheels and whistle blowing. As the train comes closer to the
platform, the whistle and rumbling of wheels become louder. The train then comes to a
stop and blows out its steam. The train then leaves the station and the rumbling of the
wheels and blowing of the whistle gradually dies way as it travels away from the
station.
• Children can play on rhythm instruments to accompany gradual and sudden changes
(crescendos and decrescendos) in music.
• Children can create and tell their own musical stories by using different instruments
and using dynamics to create a certain atmosphere or idea (Campbell & Scott-
Kassner, 1995: 166).
4.2.3 Tempo
Andress (1980: 183) explains Tempo as "the relative fastness or slowness of music".
The basic tempo, as well as changes in the speed of music, contribute and influence
expression in music (Bergethon et al., 1986: 6).
Tempo can furthermore be described as the speed of sounds following each other. The tempo
of a piece of music is indicated by terms such as andante (at a walking pace), allegro (fast),
adagio (slow). The correct tempo of a piece of music can also be determined with a
metronome. A metronome indicates the repetition of the pulse per minute, for example I ‘ 72
indicates that 72 quarter notes per minute should be counted to achieve the correct speed of
the music (Grobler, 1990: 40).
There are basic concepts concerning tempo that are of importance and that can be taught and
experienced by children:
• A piece of music can sound fast or slow;

• The tempo of the music can remain the same for the entire duration of the piece, or it
can change;
• Notes that follow each other fast have a fast pulse. Notes that follow each other slowly,
have a slower pulse;
88
• Slower music sounds more relaxed and peaceful and requires slower movements.
Faster music, however, encourages movements that are happier and more
enthusiastic (Grobler, 1990: 40 - 41).
The following activities can be executed to experience the concept of tempo:
• Children can be asked to sit in circle formation and pass a ball around to the basic beat
of the music. As the tempo of the music changes, the children have to change the
direction in which they are passing the ball (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 164)
• Children can do the same activity, but use their bodies to move around to the basic
beat and tempo of a particular piece of music. When the tempo changes, they are to
change direction and adapt their movements to the new tempo to indicate with their
bodies that they have heard the change in tempo (Author’s own idea).
• Children can be given two different percussion instruments, such as wooden sticks and
tambourines, and be asked to use a specific instrument with a specific tempo. For
example, when the tempo is slower and more march-like, they can walk around the
room and play on their wooden sticks. When the music changes to a faster tempo, they
can shake their tambourines while running around to the faster tempo (Author’s
suggestion).
• Children can be given the opportunity to use percussion instruments to compose their
own music in different tempos. The rest of the children can then listen to the music and
move around the room to the basic beat and tempo. When the child decides to change
the tempo of the musical composition, the rest has to follow and illustrate the changes
in tempo through changes in their movements (Author’s suggestion).
• Children can illustrate changes in tempo by singing a song in a slow tempo and
then changing the same song to a faster tempo. Children particularly enjoy this
activity when one uses a well-known action song such as The Noble Duke of York
(Nelson, 1989: 49) or Head and shoulders, knees and toes (Nelson, 1989: 55).
• The parent or teacher sings the song in a slow tempo and the child has to do all the
actions according to the slow tempo. When the parent or teacher increases the tempo
of the song, children become very excited and they love to do all the actions as fast as
89
the teacher can possibly sing and as fast as they can possibly dance and move
(Author’s suggestion).
4.2.4 Rhythm
Rhythm is explained by Andress (1980: 183) as "the combination of long and short sounds to
create patterns. Rhythm is organised in relation to beat, meter and other rhythm patterns".
There are basic concepts concerning rhythm that are of importance and that can be taught
• There is an underlying, regulating pulse or “steady beat” that can be identified in most
music;
• These regulating, recurring beats can be fast or slow, or can quicken or slow down as
the musical composition develops and progresses (tempo);
• These rhythmic beats are usually perceived in groups of twos and threes. This
grouping defines a metrical organisation;
• When long and short sounds are combined with silence, rhythmic patterns are created;
• The concept of rhythmic pattern is taught best through speech patterns (for example,
Wie- lie Wie-lie Wa- lie ; Lit-tle Miss Muf-fet ; An-ne-ke). The child gets the feeling of
long and short notes following each other (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 81).
(Author’s notation)
The child can experience the concept of rhythm through the following active listening
activities.
90
• Parents can play a selection of music for children and ask them to tap the beat on
various parts of their bodies (beat)
• Children can be asked to play the beat of a piece of music on a rhythm instrument.
• Children can be asked to clap the rhythm in speech patterns. They can use their own
names as well as the names of people, animals, toys, food, et cetera that are close and
familiar to them (rhythm).
• Children can be taught movements such as walking, skipping, galloping, running on

tiptoe. These movements can be accompanied by the correct rhythmic pattern, for
example,
(Grobler 1990: 60)
• Children can be asked to perform any of these movements while parents provide
accompaniment on a rhythmic instrument with the correct rhythmic pattern.
• Parents can play a specific rhythmic pattern on an instrument and allow children to
identify the pattern by demonstrating the correct movement (rhythm).
91
• Selections of music with easily identifiable rhythmic patterns can be played and
children can be asked to use movement to demonstrate the rhythms that they identify
auditively (rhythm).
• Parents can choose music with changes in tempo or play instruments in different
tempos. Children can be asked to move with the music and to change direction every
time they hear a change in the tempo. If there is a group, the children can sit in a circle
and pass the ball around to the beat. When the tempo changes, the children have to
change direction and pass the ball in the opposite direction (tempo).
Parents can select music with a distinctive accentuated beat (for example, African music) and
allow children to bounce a ball on the accents. The child can roll/hold/catch the ball on the
weaker beats (syncopation) (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 164).
Suitable music for this activity would be selections from Mango Groove (Addendum A: The
Best of Mango Groove CD) or Soweto String Quartet (Addendum A: Millennia CD and
Renaissance CD) (Author’s suggestion).
4.2.5 Melody
Andress (1980: 183) introduces Melody as, "a sequence of single repeated pitches (the
relative highness or lowness of sounds) [and explains that] pitches in a melodic line may move
up or down by steps or skips or may remain the same".
There are basic concepts concerning melody that are of importance and that can be taught
• Musical sounds can be high or low, or relatively high and low in pitch;
• The musical pitches in a melody can move higher or lower or they can remain the
same for a number of beats;
• The musical pitches in a piece of music or song can move higher or lower by “steps” or
“skips”;
• Many melodies revolve around and end on a “tonal centre”;

92
• Specific melodic patterns in a song or composition can be repeated. Such repetition

can be recognised and identified by the listener (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 81);
• Each piece of music has its own melody or “tune”;
• Some melodies are sung and others played by instruments (Grobler, 1990: 42).
The following activities can be used to supply the child with musical experiences that will
develop his/her sense of pitch discrimination and his/her awareness of contour in melodies.
• Parents can sing different pitches on a neutral syllable or a word and ask children to
echo the pitches vocally (pitch).
• Ask children to imitate and sing songs that contain very high and very low pitches. An
example of a song with exaggerated contrasts in high and low are, “Lonely Goatherd”
from The Sound of Music (Oscar Hammerstein and Richard Rodgers)(pitch).
• Parents can sing scales and scale songs and ask children to describe whether they are
singing upwards or downwards. Children can also show upward motion by pointing
upward or downward by pointing downward (pitch).
• Both parents and children can exercise their creativity in creating a music score by
drawing different dots at different levels and in different patterns on a piece of paper.
The child can then play these pitches and patterns on the piano.
• Parents and children together can create a piece of music that is filled with high and
low contrasts. This piece of music can be played and recorded and the child can add
movements to it.
• Children can be encouraged to learn to sing more folk songs and nursery songs. By
doing this activity, they will learn to imitate longer melodic patterns.
• Parents can encourage children to sing a song or listen to a specific selection of music.
For more variety, parents can “shape” the contour of the music with their hands or even
use a torch to visually indicate the contour of the music.
• Children can be allowed to play and create their own melodic contour on the piano.
Parents can then imitate what the child has played and label it as “same” or play
something different and label it as “different”.
93
• Parents can play two pitches or contours on the piano. Children have to use hand
movements to show whether the pitches are the same or different, for example, palms/
thumbs up for similar pitches and thumbs down for different pitches. Children should
not be allowed to look at the piano during this game.
• Children can be presented with drawings of melodic curves. They can be encouraged
to sing or play these curves.
• Children should be allowed to draw their own melodic curves and perform them for the
parent, through singing or playing.
• The parent can let a group of children hold a long rope with both hands. A simple
melody can then be played for them to shape the melody by raising or lowering their
hands (melodic curve).
• Parents can develop movements with the child to show steps, leaps, and repeats in a
melody. A melody in which steps, leaps or repeats occur, can be sung or played while
the child demonstrate these steps, leaps or repeats with the correct movements
(Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 111-115).
4.2.6 Form
Form or structure, according to Andress (1980: 183), is "the way in which music is organised
through repetition and contrast. Structure in music involves small patterns (melodic or
rhythmic), phrases, and larger sections of the music".
There are basic concepts concerning form that are of importance and can be taught and
experienced by children:
• A recognisable musical idea or thought in a song or instrumental composition is called

a phrase. Phrases can be combined to form sections in a composition;
• The musical phrases or sections in a song or instrumental composition can be alike,

nearly alike or can differ completely;
• The structure of most musical compositions is determined by the combination of similar

and dissimilar phrases or sections (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 81).
94
• Each piece of music has a beginning, a middle part and an ending;
• An AB form occurs in pieces of music that have parts that sound the same or differ
(contrast and repetition).
Afrikaans example of AB form: Jan Pierewiet (Groot Sangboek, 1994: 33)
English example of AB form: Noble Duke of York (Nelson, 1989: 49)
Xhosa example of AB form: Sitwel’ inkuni (Gunzburg, 1987: 20)
The ABA form occurs in pieces where the first and last part of the music sounds the
same, while the middle part differs (Grobler, 1990: 42).
English example of a song in ABA form: Twinkle Little Star (Johnson, 1951: 33)
Afrikaans example of a song in ABA form: Blinkoog sterretjie (Addendum A: Olke Bolke
CD by Elizabeth Fourie)
Xhosa example of a song in ABA form: Koos die Groenteman (Xhosa version)
(Grassroots, 1990: 72,73).
The following activities can be practised for children to experience the concept of form:
• Parents can choose a song that has contrasting and repeating parts in it. One
movement can then be created for an initial musical idea or tune and another
movement for the other musical ideas. Parents can encourage children to sing the
song and to use the correct movements for each musical idea.
For example, Twinkle Little Star is written in an ABA form. Specific movements can be
used for the first part, contrasting movements for the second part and the first
movements can be repeated for the last part.
A: Twinkle, twinkle little star, how I wonder what you are. The child can imitate the
twinkling of the star with his fingers.
B: Up above the world so high, like a diamond in the sky. The child can stand on
tiptoes and pretend to reach for a star high in the sky.
A: Twinkle, twinkle little star, how I wonder what you are. The child can now repeat the
first action and again imitate the twinkling of the star with his fingers.
• Children can accompany the various sections of a piece of music on different

instruments.
95
• Parents can show and demonstrate a rondo theme (ABACAD) by providing children
with differently coloured scarves. Children should use different scarves and different
movements to demonstrate each section.
• Children can be helped to identify and sing the theme of a piece of music (Campbell &
Scott-Kassner, 1995: 167).
4.2.7 Texture and harmony
Harmony is defined as "two or more pitches (the relative highness or lowness of sounds)
sounded simultaneously; harmony usually accompanies a melodic line and has a tonal
relationship to the melody" (Andress, 1980: 183).
There are basic concepts concerning texture and harmony that are of importance and can be
taught and experienced by children:
• Songs can be sung with or without accompaniment;
• Two or more sounds can be heard together (as when a man and woman sing together)
and sound quite different from when they would be sung separately or on their own;
• When instruments are played together, the sound is different to when they are played
separately;
• Certain instruments can be used to play particular parts in a piece. Each part will then
have its own instrument combination and selection. The child will be able to hear the
contrasts in texture and harmony (Grobler, 1990: 43);
• Two or more musical sounds produced together at the same time, produce a harmony;
• A harmony can occur in a melody or in the accompaniment. Examples of harmony in

an accompaniment are chords, ostinati (repeated rhythmic or melodic patterns) or
borduns (a “drone” produced by playing the first and fifth tone of a scale
simultaneously). An example of a bordun or “drone” is the typical “Indian Drum” left-
hand melody that children play in beginner piano books, such as the Bastien Piano
series, Primer Level (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 81).
96
The following activities can be undertaken for children to experience the concepts of texture
and harmony:
• Children can be given the opportunity to sing their songs with or without
accompaniment. The teacher or parent can play the accompaniment on a guitar or
piano or the children can accompany themselves on simple percussion instruments.
The teacher can select instruments that would be suitable for a specific song, such as
wooden sticks and hand drums for a song about a horse, bells, tambourines and
triangles for a quieter song about fairies. Children should also be given the opportunity
to be creative and to decide which instruments they want for their songs. They can
even be encouraged to motivate their choice of a particular selection of instruments
• Children can be asked to sing a song and the teacher or parent can record the song on
cassette. One child can be chosen to sing the song alone and another voice can join
the first child’s voice when the same song is sung for a second time. The children could
listen to their recordings afterwards and guess how many voices are singing at a
particular stage in the song. They can even try to identify their friends' voices on the
recording. This same activity can be done with instruments (Author’s suggestion).
• Certain instruments can be used to play particular parts in a song or piece of music.
Simple nursery rhymes such as “Hickory Dickory Dock” (Johnson, 1951: 27) can be
used to illustrate different instrumental combinations and contrasts in texture. Wooden
sticks or two-tone wooden blocks can be used to illustrate the ticking of the clock.
While the wooden sticks continue to play, a cymbal can be used to illustrate the
striking of the clock. A melodic instrument such as a glockenspiel or xylophone can be
used to illustrate how the mouse runs down the clock. The xylophone should be
played from high to lower notes in a motion sweeping over the notes. This activity is
very simple and can be done by children of all ages and musical abilities (Author’s
suggestion).
• The parent or teacher can harmonise with children when they are singing. It is a good
idea to harmonise to a very well-known song that the children know well so that they
97
will not become confused. Such a harmony can be introduced very informally and the
teacher or parent can later explain the concept of a contrasting tune that makes up a
harmony (Author’s suggestion).
• Children can use paper and different coloured pens to draw the different melodic or
instrumental lines that they hear in a piece of music (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995:
166).
• Children's drawings will often exhibit other elements of music, such as dynamics or
tempo. They love to press very hard on their paper and to make scratchy motions
when music is loud or very fast and enjoy moving their pencils to the music. Some
children will respond to the atmosphere or overall mood of a piece of music and draw a
picture of flowers, houses or animals when listening to the selected music. This
drawing activity can be used to identify what children are actually listening to and are
hearing when they listen to a particular selection of music (Author’s suggestion).
4.3 The child and musical play
Play can be defined as an activity that is intrinsically motivated, pleasurable and fun to the
participant. The goal of play as an activity is not to achieve a final product, but rather that the
participant should be actively engaged in the process of play (Tarnowski, 1999: 27).
The child moves, senses and vocalises as he or she acts upon the world. Through play, the
child imitates persons and objects in an effort to sort, piece together, and understand several
different ideas. With the child’s mind moving fluently between fantasy and reality, play
becomes a very real learning experience (Andress, 1980: 3,4).
It is of importance that the process of play should be understood and to consider that play
always begins in delight and ends in knowledge (Levinowitz, 1999: 18). Play involves the child
in important processes such as decision making, planning and exerting control over situations
and it helps the child to build a self-image (Andress, 1980: 4). It is important that children’s
learning environments should be designed and created in such a way that they are
encouraged to explore materials actively, use their own initiative and imagination, as well as
interact with other children, adults and activities (Morin, 2001: 24).
Children’s play is their work. Children should have opportunities for individual
98
musical play, such as in a music corner, as well as for group musical play, such
as singing games. Children learn within a playful environment. Play provides a safe
place to try on the roles of others, to fantasize, and to explore new ideas.
Children’s play involves imitation and improvisation (MENC1992: 21[online]).
4.3.1 Types of Social play modes
Mildred Parten in 1932 conducted a classic study of different types of social play
modes in existence. These social play modes were further developed by Rubin 36 and
the following types of social play modes were added (Tarnowski, 1999: 27):
• Solitary play
During this activity, children play on their own without any interference or
suggestions from other children around them.
• Onlooker Play
This activity has the child observing and communicating with other children
who are playing, but not entering into their play.
• Parallel Play
During this activity, children play individually and independently with objects
that are identical or similar. They do not attempt to change each other’s
behaviour.
• Associative Play
During this activity, the group of children playing recognise that they are
sharing the same activity
• Co-operative Play
36 Rubin, K.H., Fein, G.C. & Vanderberg, B. 1983. "Play", in Handbook of Child Psychology: Volume 4.
Socialisation, Personality and Social Development., E.M. Heatherington. (Ed.). New York: John Wiley and Son.
pp 693-774.
99
The group of children playing during this activity assigns specific roles and
objects to each other and will set up and proclaim certain rules (Tarnowski,
1999: 27).
The concept of cognitive play was originally described by Piaget and later modified by
Smilansky 37.
The following four categories originated:
• Functional Play
During this activity children use their bodies to perform movements such as
running and jumping. By performing these movements and by manipulating
objects repeatedly, they are learning more about the world around them.
• Constructive Play
During this activity children use objects such as Lego blocks, sand or clay to
create structures and forms.
• Dramatic Play
When they are engaged in this activity, children become occupied with role
playing. They will often transform objects. A simple stick or ice-cream cone can,
for example, be transformed into a microphone.
• Games with rules

During this activity, children create and use specific rules while playing a game.
These rules determine how the play will progress (Tarnowski, 1999: 27).
4.3.2 Musical play
Musical play consists of a variety of activities that provide children with opportunities to
explore, improvise and create with sound (Tarnowski, 1999: 27). Activities involving
vocalisation, rhythmic movement of bodies or objects, or playing on instruments, can be
undertaken during musical play (Tarnowski, 1999: 28).
37 Smilansky, S. 1968. The Effects of Sociodramatic Play on Disadvantaged Preschool Children. New York:
John Wiley and Sons.
100
The classical modes of play can be modified to suit music-learning contexts. Musical play can
therefore be adapted and defined as follows:
• Co-operative Musical Play: This kind of play acknowledges the important role that
socialisation plays in children’s learning. Co-operative musical play requires the children to
interact and communicate with each other. Examples of this kind of play are singing
games and dances (Morin, 2001: 25).
• Functional Musical Play: During this kind of play the child explores vocal, instrumental and
environmental sounds, as well as the different ways and techniques by which these
sounds are produced (Morin, 2001: 25). This kind of play involves children individually.
Examples of this kind of play are exploring and playing instruments, as well as exploring
concepts and ideas through movement, singing and listening (Tarnowski, 1999: 27).
• Constructive Musical Play: This kind of play is an addition and extension of functional
musical play. Constructive musical play involves children in developing creative ideas such
as improvisation, composition, instrument making or sound recording (Morin, 2001: 25.26).
Examples of this kind of play include children singing or playing instruments and creating
their own melodies or songs. Children can be creative and make their own instruments
that have different sound qualities
• Dramatic Musical Play: During this kind of play, children use instruments or sing during
role-play, imaginary games or story-telling settings (Morin, 2001: 25.26). For example,
children can act out the story of Little Red Riding Hood by adding instruments or singing in
a special kind of voice for each character.
• Kinaesthetic Musical Play: During this kind of musical play, children respond to recorded
music, instrumental or vocal sounds through movement. The movement response can be
accompanied with or without objects such as streamers or scarves (Morin, 2001: 25.26).
This can be a very creative musical experience for children in which they can interpret and
demonstrate what they hear and feel through creative movement. Musical concepts such
as fast and slow, high and low can be demonstrated through movement.
• Games with rules: During this kind of musical play, musical experiences that are more
structured, like singing, clapping or dancing games, are included. These musical
101
experiences are accompanied by prearranged actions and/or specific rules that are
produced on a social level, with others (Morin, 2001: 26).
4.3.3 Importance of musical play
Research by Littleton (1998: 8-15) and Zimmerman (1985) 38 suggests that young children
experience music primarily through exploration and discovery. According to them it is of
importance that regular opportunities for free play are given to children and that their
spontaneous music making is regularly observed and detailed by their educators. Music
educators are advised to provide children with an environment that is musical, rich and social
and to encourage them to play (Morin, 2001: 26).
Researchers specialising in learning theories emphasise musical play as an important and
essential factor in the holistic development of the child. Links between musical play, divergent
and critical thinking, and creativity have been researched and accentuated by music
educators like Dorman (1990:15-17) and Tarnowski (1999:28).
Play benefits the child by enhancing the child’s cognitive and language development, as well
as their musical understanding. Processes that are part of the child’s cognitive development
include problem solving, divergent thinking, language development and creativity. During
musical play, children are given the opportunity to interact with others on a social level, to be
less egocentric in their thinking and to focus on playmates around them. Skills such as
sharing, patience, taking turns and cooperating with others are learnt. This development of
social skills is closely linked to the child’s emotional development.
Children are able to express and learn to cope with their feelings through musical play. Such
positive experiences build and contribute to the child’s positive self-concept (Tarnowski, 1999:
28).
38 Zimmerman, M.P. 1985. State of the art in early childhood music and research. The Young Child and Music.
Boswell, J. & Reston, V.A. (Eds.), Music Educators National Conference: 65-78.
102
Further research that supports these links and provides evidence of the value of musical play
is represented in the naturalistic studies of Littleton (1991) 39 and Smithrin (1997: 17-24).
These researchers have found that young children were able to produce imaginative, creative,
and expressive musical ideas when they were given opportunities for free play (Morin, 2001:
26).
Research done by Tarnowski and Leclerc (1994: 9-16) examined the effects that music-
teaching styles have on children’s musical behaviour. During their research, four music-
teaching styles (entertainer, director, responsive partner and observer) were implemented in a
free-playing music class environment. They found that children who were observed by their
educator and were allowed to work on their own without any adult intervention, exhibited the
largest quantity, as well as variety, of musical behaviours. Further speculations by these
researchers suggest that direct teaching might even inhibit and restrict children’s creative and
exploratory style of learning.
Smithrin (1997: 17-24) found that, when taking the teacher-as-observer role, the children in
the free-play music periods demonstrated musical abilities and became absorbed in music
play for a longer time. These children furthermore explored sounds freely, used instruments in
unique ways, taught and interacted with their peers and played spontaneous games.
Research done by Littleton (1998:8-15) and Smithrin (1997: 17-24) confirmed that children in
free-music contexts play more co-operatively, negotiate conflict effectively, handle instruments
carefully and solve most problems of noise on their own (Morin, 2001: 26).
4.3.4 How do children play at different ages and different developmental phases?
It is of importance that parents should have knowledge of how children of different ages and
in different phases play and develop socially. This knowledge will help parents to understand
children’s developmental phases and help them to plan suitable musical activities and
experiences that will enhance each specific developmental phase of the child.
39 Littleton, J.D. 1991. Influence of play settings on preschool children's music and play behaviours. Ph.D.
dissertation, University of Texas at Austin, University Microfilms No. 9128294.
103
4.3.4.1 Musical play and the two-year-old toddler
Although two-year-old toddlers do not play co-operatively with others, they enjoy being with
other children. Children of this age enjoy and play mother-child games and love to feel, pound,
or squeeze toys that produce sounds or motion. Children feel in full control of their
environment when they can produce loud sounds, and find banging drums the most satisfying.
They enjoy games, finger play and action songs in which they can combine rhythmic chanting
with touching their toes and fingers.
Two-year-old children enjoy playing with language, often in a repetitive manner, and they
enjoy creating simple rhymes. They furthermore enjoy repeating the same song, chant or
game over and over again.
Children move by swaying, swinging their arms, clapping their hands and bouncing their
bodies. They will often delight adult observers with an improvised dance in which they bounce
and bob to music with little movement through space. The rhythms that children dance do not
necessarily follow the basic beat of the music. Their movements may be awkward, but their
bodies are definitely responding to the musical sounds with joyful enthusiasm. Children of this
age are already demonstrating the ability to discriminate between musical and non-musical
sounds in their environment (Andress, 1980: 4-5).
4.3.4.2 Musical play and the three-year-old toddler
At the age of three, toddlers begin to play in the company of others, sometimes even co-
operatively with others. Toddlers understand (although reluctantly) what it means to share and
take turns (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 96).
Children at this age are working hard to acquire language and their imaginative play begins to
reflect language and logic. The three-year-old’s imagination is often bounded by what has
recently been seen or what has caught their interest. Children sing and express their thoughts
out aloud in sounds and words that express their feelings and actions. They enjoy playing
singing games and using word patterns in a playful, repetitive way. Language, however, is not
necessarily used as a conversation tool.
104
Three-year-old children are able to move in a better co-ordinated way than before and are
able to reflect fairly accurate rhythmic responses. They will use much of their energy in
performing movements such as falling and tumbling down. They will, however, exercise some
form of control if they believe it important to do so (Andress, 1980: 4-5).
Children enjoy dramatic play with others and may have a special friend with whom they can
play and talk. Toddlers of this age develop awareness and a greater interest in being part of a
group, but still seek the approval of adults and their parents (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 96).
The musical implications and suitable musical activities for this stage of social development
involve:
• Playing simple, non-competitive games with their peers, for example, Musical Chairs40,
Hullabalooby Loo 41 (Nelson, 1989: 99);
• Enjoying finger play, action songs and songs that encourage rhythmic movement.
Simple dance songs and partner activities can now be introduced and performed with
toddlers;
• Parents and adults should always encourage, praise and approve the toddler's efforts
4.3.4.3 Musical play and the four-year-old preschooler
Four-year-old preschoolers are still learning to share but this is a great time for making friends
as the preschooler at the age of four enjoys playing with other children and exhibits more
social behaviour. They are better at controlling their emotions, are more confident and
assured of themselves. However, preschoolers still experience frequent stormy periods and
need adults as arbitrators (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 96).
40 During musical chairs a song is played and children have to move around. Chairs are placed in a sircle form or any
other way across the room. The moment the music stops all the children have to find a chair and sit down. The child
who was not able to find a chair has to sit out while the song is played another time. This game is repeated untill there
are only one child left.
41 During this game children have to perform the specific actions that they are singing about. They stand in a sircle
formation and have to place different parts of their bodies in the middle of the sircle. First they put their hands in the
sircle, then their feet, and so on.
105
It is very important that children should be provided with opportunities for individual
exploration and discovery by allowing them to choose their own materials and work at a self-
chosen rate. Games involving simple tonal and timbre discrimination tasks are of great
interest. Four-year-olds are developing the ability to see relationships and are successful at
ordering and classifying sounds and therefore are able to organise sounds to help express a
story or accompany a song. They are also beginning to remember sequence and order; they
listen with sustained interest and love dramatisations.
Four-year-children talk with much exaggeration and their favourite songs are those that rhyme
and contain silly language, as well as nonsense words. The child’s involvement with groups
and other children becomes more important therefore the child tries hard to match the tones of
other children singing. They are also able to perform movement activities with much more
accuracy (Andress, 1980: 5).
are as follows:
• Parents can play singing games, and simple circle and line dances with preschoolers;
• Parents can provide opportunities for the child to be the leader in action songs;
• Parents should encourage and actively support children in their efforts (McDonald &
Simons, 1989: 96).
4.3.4.4 Musical play and the five-year-old preschooler
At the age of five, preschoolers enjoy the company of other children and want to be with them.
Children at this age are interested in group play and group activities and are better able to
cope with group experiences. Parents need to help children in cooperating with other children.
Preschoolers have the desire to please important adults in their lives (McDonald & Simons,
1989: 96).
Children play both independently and socially when performing or exploring music. Five-year-
old children demonstrate their growing ability to reverse a trend of thoughts by repeating
simple music patterns. They are now more aware of multiple sounds played together, they
respond with greater accuracy to the basic beat, they possess greater skill at matching the
106
tones of others singing, they use visual icons representing musical sound and are growing in
ability to improvise, organise, recall, and reorganise musical ideas and sounds.
Five-year-old children speak conversationally with others in an attempt to seek information.

Their play still involves a lot of imagination since they have not totally separated fantasy from
reality. Because they have a higher degree of muscle co-ordination, they have a better sense
of balance and are able to perform rhythmic movements more accurately (Andress, 1980: 5-
6).
involve the following:
• The preschooler is now ready to learn circle and line dances, as well as group singing
games (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 96).
Afrikaans examples: Al die veld is vrolik (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 80) and Dansliedjie
(FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 437)
English examples: If you’re happy and you know it clap your hands; Hokey Pokey
(Addendum A: Clamber club-Traditional Action Songs CD)
Xhosa examples: Umlim’use ‘stiyeni (Gunzburg, 1987: 40); Impuku nekati (Gunzburg,
1987: 38).
• Parents should support preschoolers and encourage them to play Take-a-Turn

activities and singing games (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 96).
Afrikaans example: Aljander, aljander so deur die bos (Addendum A: Clamber club-
Traditional Action Songs CD)
English example: Here we go round the Mulberry Bush (Addendum A: Clamber club-
Traditional Action Songs CD)
Xhosa examples: Impuku Nekati (The cat and the mouse) (Gunzburg, 1987: 38).
and Sifun' itshom 'am (Looking for my friend) (Grassroots, 1990: 29).
4.3.4.5 Musical Play and the six-year-old preschooler

107
At the age of six, preschoolers’ behaviour is friendly, co-operative and generous. Preschoolers
find it difficult to accept frustration and are very sensitive to real or imagined slight and insults.
They desire to be praised for their efforts and achievements.
This stage of social development entails a wide variety of musical activities by which children
can experience success and that can be provided by parents (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 96).
4.3.5 Suggestions for parents and educators joining children in playing
• Always join children in playing at their own level. Join them in the activity that they are
currently performing. It is considered inappropriate to suggest another activity to
children while they are already performing a specific activity.
• Children involved in exploratory play can be joined through parallel playing. The
educator or parent can initiate a variation on the particular activity that the child is
performing, but it is up to the child to decide whether or not he or she wants to accept
or reject that variation in their play.
• It is important that an adult should play as the child’s partner and assume the role and
rules that the child assigns to him or her
• Adults should respect children’s responses to their ideas and honour children’s playing.
By honouring children’s play, educators and parents are encouraging children to play
(Tarnowski, 1999: 29).
4.3.6 The Importance of communicating with the child
The adult has the important responsibility of helping children to verbalise their feelings and
understandings. When communicating with children, it is important to remember that the
testing and questioning child is the child who is learning. Every conversation, question and
answer in the learning environment is important, whether child-initiated or motivated by the
adult.
The following techniques are useful in helping the child to communicate.

Parents should:
108
• stop whatever task they are doing and listen to the child with interest;
• not tower over children, but sit or stoop and make eye-to-eye contact with the child;
• always try to hear the child out and be careful about being overly quick to disagree;
• show the child that they are interested by accepting and acknowledging how the child
feels;
• always speak words of encouragement;
• not to talk down or at the child when talking to the child, but discuss matters
intelligently with him or her;
• not subject the child to long lectures or wordy sermons.
• be consistent in what they say or do. Parents should always use a quiet, firm voice
when talking to a child (Andress, 1980: 11).
Unacceptable behaviour can be dealt with in the following number of ways:
• Always state positively what you want the child to do. For example, “Adri, pick up the
tambourine and place it on the table” and not, “Adri, don’t step on the tambourine!“
• If the child demonstrates undesirable behaviour, channel his attention and interest
away from such behaviour to a new, more positive action.
• If the child continues to argue, attempt to involve him in an agreement (Andress, 1980:
11-12).
4.4 Conclusion:
In this chapter, each developmental stage, as well as every musical experience and musical
development that children experience in each phase, is set out according to age, is discussed
and is illustrated with practical activities. The structural elements of music (timbre, dynamics,
rhythm, melody, form, texture and harmony) are explained and each element is discussed and
illustrated with practical examples and activities that parents can use to develop the concepts.
The importance of play and different types of play are discussed, and practical advice is given
to parents and educators on how to play and communicate successfully with children.
109
110
CHAPTER 5: MUSIC EDUCATION AND MUSIC EXPERIENCES IN EARLY

CHILDHOOD: BASIC SKILLS AND ACTIVITIES TO DEVELOP THESE
SKILLS
(Question: How should the parent present music education and music experiences
during early childhood?)
In this chapter the four basic skills that children should use when experiencing music will be
introduced and discussed, and practical activities to be used for developing each skill will be
presented.
5.1 Basic skills that ought to be developed with every child
There are four basic skills that need to be developed with every child: listening skills,
singing skills, rhythmic bodily movements and instrumental play. These skills play an
important role in the child’s musical development and musical experiences. Children can
experience and learn actively about music and musical concepts through these four skills.
5.1.1 Listening skills
Children need to develop three types of listening skill: auditory awareness, auditory
discrimination and auditory memory and sequencing. Parents can use practical games
and musical activities to help children develop each specific listening skill (Grobler, 1990:
45).
5.1.1.1 Auditory awareness
Auditory awareness is demonstrated when children are able to identify the presence of sound.
Games in which children have to recognise and identify the difference between music and
silence, can be used to help them develop this skill (Grobler, 1990: 45).
Practical games and activities that parents can use for the development of this skill are:
111
• Musical Chairs. Parents can create music on any musical instrument, sing a song or
play a recorded song (preferably something lively that will encourage spontaneous and
creative movement). While the music is being played, children have to move or dance
around. When the music stops, they have to sit down on a chair. Parents are advised
not to give any verbal cues to children and to allow them to listen and decide when the
music has stopped. This activity can later be used to teach the child other concepts
such as specific movements (skipping, hopping) to appropriate music.
• Musical Statues. This game is similar to musical chairs, except that the child has to
“freeze” in any creative bodily position when the music has stopped.
• Move-the-other-way game. This game is similar to the musical statues game. The
child has to move in a particular direction and has to stop or “freeze” when the music
stops. When the music starts again, the child has to move in a different or opposite
direction.
• Where-has-the-sound-gone-to? One specific instrument that produces a sound that
gradually fades away can be chosen (for example a triangle, a piano with the
sustaining pedal pressed down, a metallophone, homemade instruments such as two
pot lids used as cymbals or glasses partially filled with water). Parents should explain
that the children have to close their eyes and that a sound will be played to them. They
have to tell the parent or show with their hands when the sound has faded away
completely (Grobler, 1990: 45).
5.1.1.2 Auditory discrimination
Auditory discrimination indicates the child’s ability to discriminate between sound and silence,
between different types of sound and contrasts in the pitch, tempo and dynamics of sound.
The child learns these concepts through association, comparison and discrimination (Grobler,
1990: 46).
Practical games and activities that parents can use to develop this skill and to teach these
concepts are:
112
• Guessing games. Children close their eyes and listen to the different sounds that the
parent is making on different objects. They then tell the parent which objects are used
to create the sounds.
• Record-a-sound games. Parents can record specific sounds such as the voices of
family members or friends, birds chirping outside, the child’s pet dog barking, a
telephone or doorbell ringing. Special outings to the beach, town, zoo, airport or
church can be recorded as well. The child has to listen to these recordings and identify
and name the voices and sounds on the recording.
• Guess-the-instrument games. Parents choose three well-known instruments that are

distinctive and contrasting in sound quality (for example, drum, bell and cymbal).
Parents then first demonstrate and play these instruments to children before asking
them to either close their eyes or stand behind a partition such as a couch or curtain.
Parents then play one instrument at a time for the child to identify the particular
instrument. After this has been done successfully, the parent can play two instruments
simultaneously. The child has to listen and identify both instruments. Parents can ask
somebody to help them and play three instruments at the same time for the child has to
identify all three instruments. Children love this game and will try very hard to take a
peep at the instruments. Parents are advised to ensure that children do not peep or
see the instruments that are used.
• Which-one-is-gone? The parent plays two instruments while the child closes his
eyes. After a while the sound of one of the instruments disappears and the child has to
guess which instrument is missing. The same game can be played with three
instruments.
• Spot-the-Contrasts game. The child needs to be able to identify and perform

contrasts in music, such as:
Loud /soft: Parents can play loudly on drums while children imitate the drums by
stepping noisily to the drum beats. Parents can then change their playing to beating the
drum softly, while children use lighter steps or tiptoe in step with the softer drumbeats.
Parents can make up words as they go along, for example, “I am walking loudly with
the drum” and “I am walking softly on my toes”.
113
Fast /slow: Parents can use a drum, wooden sticks or a tambourine to create a steady
beat for the child. Parents explain to children that they will be walking to the beat. As
an imaginary and very steep hill appears, the beat will slow down and they will climb
the hill more slowly. When they reach the top of the hill, the beat will become faster and
they will walk faster downhill. Parents can explain that the children have to try and keep
up with the beat and that, when the beat becomes faster or slower, they must slow
down or speed up their movements as well.
High / low: Parents can use their voices to create high and low sounds. When the
high sounds are made, children can pretend to be picking an apple, or a star from high
up in the sky. When the low sounds are made, children can pretend to be picking up
the apples from the ground. Parents can explain and demonstrate high and low
sounds on the piano, recorder, xylophone or any other melodic instrument. Children
can be asked to close their eyes and identify the sounds as low or high (Grobler, 1990:
46).
• Children can be asked to close their eyes while parents drop a familiar object such as a
bunch of keys or a pen. They have to listen to the sound and then try and name the
object.
• Children can be asked to close their eyes while parents drop an object such as a pencil
onto a table from a specific height. Children are then asked to use their hands to
indicate from how high the object fell. Different heights and objects can be used for this
activity.
• Children can be asked to sit behind a screen or create their own screen with an old
sheet or cardboard. Different instruments can then be played by parents, or other
sounds can be created by, for example, shaking different objects or making different
sounds with their bodies. Children are required to listen to the sounds and identify the
source of sound or the instrument (Campbell and Scott-Kassner, 1995: 162).
5.1.1.3 Auditory memory and sequencing
Auditory memory and sequencing involve the ability to imitate noises and sounds and to
remember these sounds or notes in a particular sequence. This skill is best demonstrated in
114
the child’s ability to learn and remember simple songs that have previously been heard from
an adult or other children. Every song that has been learnt and memorised by children is
evidence of a memory exercise and will be of great value to them for later reading preparation
and when they have to solve mathematical problems systematically (Grobler, 1990: 46).
Practical games and activities that the parent can use to develop this skill are:
• Teaching songs. Parents can teach their children enjoyable songs by singing and
acting out songs to them. Songs that children love to sing and perform include:
(i) Finger songs and rhymes:

Afrikaans examples: Duimpie (Hyman, 1980: 5)
Duimelot (rhyme) (Opperman, 1981: 12),
Duimpie (rhyme) (Opperman, 1981: 11);
English examples: Tommy Thumb’s up (Haines & Gerber 1980: 60),
Give a little whirl (rhyme) (Haines & Gerber 1980: 46),
Five little squirrels (rhyme) (Haines & Gerber 1980: 48)
Xhosa example:
Nonyane tse tlhano (Five Birds in a tree) Tswana finger rhyme (Cock & Wood, 1995:
10)
Izinyoni ezinhlanu (Five Birds were sitting in a tree) Zulu finger rhyme (Cock &
Wood, 1995: 19),
Ngineminwe emihlanu (I have five fingers) Zulu Finger rhyme (Cock & Wood, 1995:
15)
(ii) Action songs:

Afrikaans example: Boetie-lief kom laat ons dans (Groot Sangboek, 1994: 146)
English example: Head, shoulders, knees and toes (Addendum A: Clamber Club CD)
Xhosa example: Iitakana (The little birds) (Gunzburg, 1987: 5)
(iii) Songs about themselves and their bodies:
Afrikaans example: Kop tot toon (Potgieter & Jordaan, 1984: 54)
English example: A song about me (Pitts et al., 1949: 3)
Xhosa example: Intloko namagxa (Head, shoulders,...) (Gunzburg, 1987: 11)
115
(iv) Songs about routines:
Afrikaans example: Ek was my (Rudolph, 1985: 233)

English example: Get up (Pitts et al., 1949: 44)
Xhosa examples: Siyangqusha (We are stamping mealies) (Gunzburg, 1987: 24)
Kusasa sivuka (In the morning we wake up) (Gunzburg, 1987: 7)
(v) Songs about special people:
Afrikaans example: Dit is my mense (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 446)

English example: I love somebody (Nelson, 1989: 151)
Xhosa examples: Umama uyaphi (Where is Mommy going?) (Gunzburg, 1987: 12)
Umama notata (My Mom and Dad) (Gunzburg, 1987: 13)
(vi) Songs about animals in their lives:
Afrikaans example: My Perd (Rudolph, 1985: 177,178)

English example: Five Little Ducks (Nelson, 1989: 25),
Xhosa example: Impuku nekati (The Mouse and the Cat) (Gunzburg, 1987: 38,39).
• Playing echo or “follow-the-leader” games.
(i) Parents can clap a short rhythmic pattern and ask children to echo these patterns by
clapping.
(ii) Parents can sing short patterns on neutral syllables such as “la” and ask children to
imitate the melody with their voices.
(iii) Parents can create rhythmic speech patterns and at the same time tap the rhythms
on their knees, using their fists. Children can be asked to imitate these speech
patterns, as well as the actions (For example, “Een twee drie vier, kyk wie is hier”).
Parents can create their own patterns and words, use the child’s name or use well-
known nursery rhymes for this activity. Children love greeting patterns such as “Hel-lo
An-ne-ke, how are you to-day?”
116
(iv) Parents can reverse the roles and allow children to create their own rhythmic
speech patterns. Parents should encourage them to use their favourite nursery rhymes
and change the words by adding the names of family and friends to the rhymes
(Grobler, 1990: 47).
5.1.2 Singing skills
5.1.2.1 The importance and function of singing for the preschool child
The primary function of preschool singing is to help children develop their ability to:
• interact aesthetically with vocal music.
• teach preschoolers to use their voices in an expressive way.
• encourage children to sing tunes created by others or themselves (Andress, 1980: 54-
55).
Some prekindergarten teachers don’t understand that singing is a learned
process - and it is. Children must be given developmentally appropriate
opportunities to learn how to sing... Edith Roebuck, music consultant for the
Early Learning Centre of the Chelsea Schools in Chelsea, as quoted by Ponick
(1999: 35).
Secondary functions of singing involve the fact that children learn more about themselves
and how they relate to the world through songs. Songs that represent values, ideas and
important learning concepts for the child’s social growth or self imagery are good singing
choices for the child (Andress, 1980: 54-55).
117
The three- to four-year-old toddler may experience difficulty in singing songs musically
correctly and will rather learn through music than focusing on the music itself. However, as
children develop their auditive and physical skills and reproduce melodies and songs more
accurately, both the primary and secondary functions of music start to become relevant
(Andress, 1980: 54-55).
5.1.2.2 Guidelines to use when selecting children’s songs for young children
It is important that songs for young children should be chosen carefully by teachers and
parents. A large number of songs by adults are written specifically for children, but many of
them unfortunately are not necessarily suitable for the young child. Different criteria and
guidelines should be used when composing or choosing appropriate children’s songs for
young preschoolers. The basic fundamental characteristics of children’s songs should be that
they are simple, genuine and sincere, without being artificial; childlike and never childish
(McLachlan, 1986: 9).
The following guidelines can be used in selecting children’s songs:
• Children’s songs should never be too long. Songs with many verses are acceptable,
but each verse should be short.
• The vocal range used in the song should never be too wide. The best range for such
children’s songs is between the D (above middle C) and the D an octave higher.
• Songs for toddlers younger than five should consist of two, three or four tones.
Examples of such songs are:
Afrikaans example: Trippe trappe trone (3 tones) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 434)
English example: A song about me (4 tones) (Pitts et al., 1949: 3)
• Songs for preschoolers aged five to seven can range between five to eight tones in a
song. Examples of such songs are:
Afrikaans examples: So ry die trein (6-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel,1979: 301,302)
Pollie ons gaan Pêrel toe (5-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel ,1979: 209)
118
Ou Paddatjie (6-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel ,1979: 446)
Further examples of suitable songs are mentioned in Addendum B.

English example: Little Bunny hop, hop, hop (5-tone range)
Xhosa example: Umzi watsha (6-tone range) (McLachlan, 1986: 9)
• The melody of children’s songs should always be simple and natural and must enable
young children to sing easily without accompaniment. A good indication of the
appropriateness of a melody or a song for young children is that they sing it
spontaneously and unconsciously by themselves. Difficult intervals, fast melismas,
quick chord changes, modulations to different keys and added accidental signs are
inappropriate in songs for young children and result in children singing the songs with
the incorrect intonation (McLachlan, 1986: 10).
• Songs should be rhythmically simple and the rhythm of the melody should always be
interwoven with the natural rhythm and accents of the lyrics. Notes that are held for a
long period of time, tied notes and unexpected syncopation will complicate songs
rhythmically and should therefore be avoided (McLachlan, 1986: 10).
• The text or lyrics of children’s songs should always be written in a manner that allows
the child to identify with and relate to it. Repetitions, sound words and nonsense
rhymes usually are a firm favourite with children. Teachers and parents should be
careful not to choose songs with lyrics that are too sentimental, affectionate, artificial or
childish. Children love nonsense words and rhymes such as: "Nick nack paddy wack,
give the dog a bone" and "Olke bolke riebietjie stolke olke bolke knor" (McLachlan,
1986: 11).
• Children’s songs have a specific atmosphere and character when it comes to the
particular melody and lyrics. It is important that the character of both the melody and
the lyrics should complement each other (McLachlan, 1986: 11).
• A good children’s song will always have lyrics and a line of melody that appeal to
young children.
• Another indication that a children’s song is successful and of good quality is that
children show their enjoyment of the song by singing eagerly, spontaneously and
correctly on their own without accompaniment (McLachlan, 1986: 12).
Children’s songs can be divided into four main categories. These categories are:
119
• Children's songs that have a folk origin. Such songs are called folk songs or nursery
rhymes and the composers of such songs usually are unknown.
• Composed children’s songs based on and composed around appropriate lyrics for
children. These songs, however, are not always successful.
• Composed children’s songs with lyrics that are suitable for young children but have a
melody that is more suitable for the older child. These songs can be presented
successfully to selected groups of talented young singers or young solo singers.
• Composed children’s songs in which the lyrics and character are childlike, but which
are so advanced on a musical level that they can only be performed by adults
5.1.2.3 Afrikaans folk songs for preschoolers aged between five and seven:
Research done on the origin of Afrikaans folk songs concluded that there are mainly three
categories of Afrikaans folk songs. These categories are:
(i) Folk songs of which both the lyrics and melody originated in South Africa. Examples of
such songs are: Daar kom die wa (Die Groot Sangboek, 1994: 79); Horlosie in die sak
(FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 355).
(ii) Folk songs of which the lyrics originated in South Africa, but the original melody is from
Europe. Most of these melodies are from Holland, Germany, France and England and
are used in their original form or have been varied slightly. Examples of folk songs with
an unchanged melody are: O die liewe Martatjie (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 137) and
Afrikaners is plesierig (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 344).
(iii) Examples of folk songs that have melodies from other countries but which were
changed are: Sarie Marais (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 236) and O Boereplaas (FAK
Sangbundel, 1979: 550).
(iv) Folk songs with melodies resulting from a mixture of bits and pieces of different
melodies. Similarities can be noticed in folk songs such as Vanaand gaan die volkies
120
koring sny (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 420) and Solank as die rietjie in die water lê (FAK
Sangbundel, 1979: 391) and in the folk songs Japie my skapie (FAK Sangbundel,
1979: 229) and Hoe ry die boere (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 303) (McLachlan, 1986: 44).
Typical characteristics of Afrikaans folk songs are that they are written in a simple, sincere,
light-hearted and humorous manner, mostly in a major key signature and very seldom in a
simple triple time signature. The reason why most of these songs are written in a major key
signature is due to the type of instrument used for accompaniment. These instruments mainly
are the concertina, which is limited to the three primary major chords (I IV V) and the guitar
Suitable Afrikaans folk songs for preschoolers between the ages of five and seven are:
Daar kom die Alibama (only the first part is suitable) (6-tone range) (FAK
Sangbundel, 1979: 446)
So ry die trein (6-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 446)
Pollie ons gaan Pêrel toe (5-tone range); (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 209)
Ou Paddatjie (6-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 446)
Hansie slim (5-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 449)
My familie (6-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 446)
Daar kom tant Alie (6-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 418)
Saai die waatlemoen (7-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 365)
Japie my skapie (8-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 229)
Ons is musikante (8-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 343)
Dis julle wat die wind (8-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 428)
Tant Hessie se witperd (8-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 385)
Ver in die wêreld Kittie (8-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 329)
Aai, aai die witborskraai (8-tone range) (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 369)
5.1.2.4 Guidelines and activities that parents can use to help children with the development of
their singing skills
121
It is of importance that parents use children’s innate, natural vocal musical ideas (songs that
children improvise on their own), as well as structured songs by others, simultaneously
when presenting a vocal programme for children.
Other factors that should be considered when choosing songs for children are: children’s
vocal range, their ability to produce melodic and rhythmic patterns, their tonal and rhythmic
memory, as well as their auditory discrimination skills (Andress, 1980: 55).
(i) The Child’s own, improvised songs
The voices of young children have a broad range of pitch and this can be seen and heard
through their crying, squealing and laughter. The child, however, has a limited range when
singing formally to others. This limited range reaches from a d’ (above middle C) to an a’ (six
notes higher than middle C), giving the child a range of five notes.
Children tend to use only two to three pitches in their individual ranges, but will demonstrate a
wider range and pitch variations in songs that they improvise, as well as in games involving
sound play.
Children will furthermore sing in a low, soft, chanting voice and only use slight inflections when
singing songs with or to other people. A broader range and variation in pitch is possible, but
children do not consciously control the highs and lows in their singing. Their variations of pitch
depend on the emotion evoked by the game they are playing and the posture of their bodies
while they are in action.
Children should be allowed and encouraged to:
• choose their own vocal range, which feels comfortable to them;

• use sounds when they are playing games (tonal play);
• create their own singsong melodies (through composed melodies) when
they are playing games with their toys or pets or by themselves.
122
These activities will help children to use their voices more freely to develop agility and will lead
to greater control of specific pitches in their voices.
Parents can use echo play techniques when children are playing singsong games. Parents
can initiate singing conversations with children and this activity can lead to delightful operas in
which both parent and child act out a specific role. This type of free musical play is ideal for
the vocal development of three- to four-year-old toddlers (Andress, 1980: 56).
Since three- to four-year-old toddlers learn mainly through imitation, their enjoyment of these
simple echo play games is extreme and they will eventually develop a self-satisfying need to
sing with a feeling for a tonal centre. Children will choose their own pitches and use these
tones to improvise two-tone or three-tone chants, catchy jingles and even rhyming chants.
All these chants can eventually lead to the lyrics of a song. Such songs are of great
importance in the child’s vocal development and are usually freely improvised and used at
random by the child.
It is important for parents to enter this creative world discreetly and to always leave the child in
control of the creative process (Andress, 1980: 57).
Andress (1980: 56) suggests the following activities for helping children develop their own
musical ideas and improvised songs:
(a) Voice inflection games (playing with sounds through the use of the voices)
• Parents can play "copy-cat" games with children. They can choose a word such as
“hello” and sing it to the child in many ways. The child can then copy the word as
well as the inflection of the parent’s voice. Parents can elaborate on this game by
singing short sentences for children to copy;
• Parents can use puppets when playing with children. This will encourage children to
participate and be creative without feeling pressured. It is important that these
puppets represent people because the child understands that people can sing,
while animals cannot sing. This association is therefore further enhanced, namely
123
that singing is an appropriate activity for children, since they are also people and
they can also sing (Andress, 1980: 58);
• Parents can use movements to encourage children to use various voice inflections.
Choose a word such as “now” and ask children to move in various ways. Every time
the child’s foot touches the ground, the parent can say the word “now”. Children
can be encouraged to use loud or soft steps or to indicate height by tiptoe stepping.
This fun activity will help children to use their voices creatively and will show them
that they can use their bodies as a musical score for others to follow (Andress,
1980: 59).
(b) Creating through composed melodies
• Since children love books and enjoy imitating adults “reading”, parents can create
their own song book for children. This book should contain simple pictures that
present a story line, as well as music notation written on a stave. Music notation
should only serve as a symbol to show the child that this is a singing and not a
reading book. Parents need not be able to follow the notation. Simple pictures of an
egg and a chick or of a clown doing tricks can be used for such a song book
(Andress, 1980: 60)
(c) Echo Singing
Parents can sometimes enter into children’s playing and turn their conversations into sung
responses. Parents can start echo singing by singing questions and encouraging children to
imitate pitches and words or to create their own sung responses (Andress, 1980: 61).
• Parents can accompany their own daily tasks by singing chants and encourage the
child to join in the singing. For example: “Mam-ma gaan kos maak, wat wil jy eet?”,
“Mom-my will make some food, what shall we eat?”
(d) Singing with a tonal centre

124
• The child begins to show awareness of tonality when he or she starts to use,
improvise and sing simple, repeated melodic patterns as well as harmonic
accompaniments. The following activities can be used to help children sing with a
tonal centre:
• Parents can make use of two- or three-tone chants sung to children to show them
how to create their own songs. Children can use these tones and create their own
chants and songs from them. For example: "Yneh! Yneh! You can’t catch me",
"Wê-la Ka-pê-la, kan my nie vang nie!"
• Parents can play one chord repeatedly on a guitar or autoharp (C major or e

minor). Simple melodies can now be improvised to match this chord. Parents
can even let the child to do the strumming while the parent presses down the
specific chord (Andress, 1980: 66).
• Parents who are not able to play an instrument can ask a musician or music
teacher to prerecord certain melodic or rhythmic patterns on a cassette. Each
pattern, which should be a simple ostinato played on a mallet type instrument,
should be repeated for about three minutes. The child should be allowed to
listen to and manipulate the recording. The child can then use these recordings
as an accompaniment to his or her song making and try to create a song that
will fit the accompaniment (Andress, 1980: 67).
(e) Creating songs that rhyme
Children love music filled with rhythm and rhyme. Older children will start to use rhyme to
organise their songs. Rhythm, meter, as well as phrases will start to appear in their self-
125
composed songs. The following activities can be used to help children add rhyming to their
song-making:
• Parents can sing a simple chant about body parts and words that rhyme with it. For
example: parents can point to a specific body part and sing, “Is this my rose?”
Children can chant and correct the parent, “No, it’s your nose!” This activity can be
repeated and the parent can sing chants about other objects. For example: “Is this
a spoon?” and “No, a balloon!”
• Parents can use playground rhyming when children are playing spontaneously. For
example: when a child is jumping on a trampoline, the parent can create a
spontaneous rhyme such as “An-ne-ke jumps up, An-ne-ke jumps down, An-ne-ke
jumps right to the ground”. The child will usually join in the game and create his/her
own rhyming chants.
• Parents can encourage children to sing and improvise nonsense songs and
ideas. It is important that the purpose should always be to teach and not to
confuse the child. For example: the parent can start and say, “I know a cat that
says: Woof, woof, woof! “ The child will quickly correct the parent and will enjoy
this fun-filled activity.
• Parents should encourage children to sing nonsense songs and to use fantasy
in their play and singing. Fantasy demands a great deal of creative thinking from
126
the child and allows them to feel great power and to feel big and important
(Andress 1980: 65).
• Children should be encouraged to create their own words and parents should
always praise and acknowledge the child’s creative efforts and songs.
(ii) The Child singing the structured songs of others
Mothers and fathers need to know that just as the child who is read to regularly
is more likely to become a reader, so too the child who is sung to will more likely
become a singer and hence, ultimately, a more developmentally advanced
musical child (Szabo, 1999: 19).
Up to now young children have been allowed to control the way they use their voices; many
opportunities were given for free, vocal improvisations; simple melodic ideas were modelled
for them by parents; and many auditory experiences dealing with auditory discrimination were
introduced to them.
However, due to increased social awareness and children’s need for group-orientated
activities, participating and singing within a group setting, as well as matching specific tones,
becomes more important. By now, children should therefore be ready to perform structured
music, to cope with the language of the song, to be able to match pitches and specific
intervals, to discriminate between longer and shorter sounds and to sing all of these in simple
rhythmic combinations (Andress, 1980: 71).
When singing structured songs for the first time, children will only choose to sing fragments of
the structured songs. Although they may appreciate all the parts of a song, they might choose
to sing only certain parts. Their choice is usually based on their interest, the language and
their ability to imitate the music.
In the beginning, children’s singing and pitch might not be perfect and they might chant the
words rather than sing them. It is important that parents accept the child’s song and to
remember that “the teacher has a song and the child has a song, too” (Andress, 1980: 71).
127
For children to sing in tune requires the ability to match tones and rhythms and to socially
“agree to a oneness of sound at a given time”. Some children will need more time and
experience to attain such skills for in tune singing (Andress, 1980: 71).
Andress (1980: 70) suggests the following activities to help children perform the structured
songs of others and songs from their own culture:
(a) Responding to rhythm in a melody
Children should be encouraged to combine simple chanting and movements. By

combining these two activities, children learn and experience voice inflection, the
feeling of phrases, rhythm patterns in words, meter, and the feeling of an underlying
beat. These chants or rhythmic speech patterns should always be repetitive, simple
and no longer than two lines. Children can improvise and create their own chants or
simple nursery rhymes can be used for this activity. They can even combine simple
clapping or walking with such chants (Andress, 1980: 71).
(b) Matching tones of a melody
Once children have mastered simple chants, the chants can be varied from speaking to
singing chants. These chants can be sung to two or three tones. Children should be
encouraged to improvise and sing a chant on their own, using two or three different
tones. They can then combine their tone matching with body movements’ which could
also be used to indicate the two or three different tones that the child is singing.
Children could touch the tops of their heads for a particular tone, and their shoulders
for another tone. For the highest tone, they could use their fingers to point up above
their heads. This activity will enhance the concept of placing their voices at different
pitches and give children a physical kinaesthetic connection with this abstract concept
(Andress, 1980: 74).
5.1.3 Rhythmic bodily movements
Campbell and Scott-Kassner (1995: 185) stress the fact that music and movement cannot be
separated from each other for children. Children’s love of movement can be seen in their
128
enthusiastic reaction expressed through spontaneous bodily movements, such as heads

nodding, toes tapping, arms swinging and bodies rocking when exposed to music.
Children develop their musical skills by what they experience through hearing, sight and their
bodies. When they listen, sing or play particular instruments, all their senses (aural, visual and
kinaesthetic) are stimulated and the combination of all their experiences helps them in the
development of their own musical skills and abilities.
When children listen to and experience music, they often move spontaneously to the music
they hear. It is the task of the music educator to take these natural and spontaneous
movements of children and connect, form and direct it to musical concepts such as form,
rhythm, melody, phrasing, texture and dynamics. This connection to music concepts should
be done in such a manner that children are able to understand and grasp these concepts
(Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 185).
Music educators can help children to combine their movements with body sounds such as
stepping, clapping, tapping or snapping their fingers. They can show children how to combine
actions with their singing, how to master structured steps for a dance and how to express
what they hear and feel creatively through movement. All these kinds of movements will
enable the child to internalise and combine musical concepts, express themselves musically,
and give them an opportunity to socialise and cooperate with others (Campbell & Scott-
Kassner, 1995: 186).
Children exhibit different movements and skills at different ages. Infants younger than six
months are only able to react to music through generalised body movements and are not able
to synchronise their movements to the rhythm of the music. At the age of two, toddlers are
able to respond to musical stimulation by rocking, bouncing and waving their arms to the
music that they hear. Having developed walking and running skill, they will enjoy clapping to
music and songs that are sung.
Between the ages of three and four toddlers will continue to practise and repeat all the actions
and movements that they know and will start to create and copy new movements. They have
gained the ability to sing and perform simple action songs and game songs.
129
Because preschoolers between the ages of five and six are able to perform much more
complicated movements and actions, they begin to develop rhythmic clapping and patting
skills and are able to perform galloping (one-sided skipping) movements, as well as rope
skipping. They are therefore ready to perform simple folk dances in line and circle formations
and their small muscle co-ordination has developed to the extent that they are able to draw
and write (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 188).
5.1.3.1 The sequential development of movement in early childhood and practical activities
(Question: How should movement activities be presented to the child?)
The developmental sequence projected for movement in the early childhood comprises the
following six stages (Andress, 1980: 47):
• Expressive movement centred on the self
The initial movements of children are centred on their own bodies. Children before the age
of three are still labelling and identifying objects and are not ready for the experience of
“being something else”. To “be” something else, for example a butterfly, presupposes
knowledge of what a butterfly is and how it moves (Andress, 1980: 24).
Expressive movements centred on the self will require suggesting to children that they
move in as many ways as they can, to sounds that are high and low; fast and slow;
smooth and jagged; loud and soft; and to the various timbres (tone colours) of sounds
(Andress, 1980: 47).
• Imagery in movement
Children respond to music and sound by performing movements such as thrusting,

swinging, swaying, opening and closing, short and sharp, and multidirectional levels.
Children also deal with sequence through movement (Andress, 1980: 47).
130
• Transition to patterned movement
The adult responds to the child’s beat and the child then grows in ability to respond to the
beat of others (Andress 1980: 47).
• Responding to the underlying beat
The child is able to move with sounded beat and the beat is now “internalized” (Andress
1980: 47).
• Movement in relation to the underlying beat
The child becomes aware of longer and shorter sounds in relation to the beat. When these
longer and shorter sounds are combined, they form rhythm patterns. The child is now able
to move to the rhythm pattern of words (Andress, 1980: 47).
• Dance
Dance is a conscious activity that requires the child to respond in a precise rhythmic way.
When the child recreates a dance, it is defined that there will be a certain space used; a
structure is involved; and that the dance will be performed. The child learns how to use
space specifically and how to work within a structure. Floor patterns and gestures that
involve repetition and contrasts are used in dances. These movements may be planned for
short ideas, longer musical phrases, or large selections of music. The music can be the
result of the dance or the dance can be planned to follow the music. Simple and
appropriate dance materials to use for young children are: playing party games, circle, folk
and novelty dances (Andress,1980: 44).
5.1.3.2 Basic movements that the preschool child should be able to identify and perform
Every preschooler should be able to identify and perform the following basic movements:
5.1.3.2 (i) Non-locomotor movements (in place): Stretch; bend at all joints; swing; rock; twist;
bounce; strike; shake; push; pull; sway; rise; collapse.
131
5.1.3.2 (ii) Locomotor movements (across space): walk; run; jump; hop; gallop; skip; slide;
leap; lunge; strut (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192-194).
Both locomotor and non-locomotor movements can be varied or combined in the following
ways to create various new combinations and patterns:
• Movements can be varied by changing the energy level of each movement. This can
be done by using different levels of energy or by introducing gradual changes in
energy;
• Movements can be varied by changing the speed or tempo of each movement by

varying the levels of tempo or by using gradual changes in speed;
• Movements can be varied by changing their dimensions. These movements can be

made smaller, bigger, longer or shorter to create variety;
• Movements can be varied by changing the use of space when performing these
movements;
• The flow of movements can be varied by performing some in a smooth and some in a
jumpy manner or by using abrupt or gradual stops when performing movements;
• Movements can be varied by changing the direction. Movements can be performed in

the air, on the floor or with the bodies of the children (Aronoff, 1969: 44).
Children perform movements such as walking, running, skipping, galloping, swaying and
rocking naturally and these movements should be included when presenting movement
activities to children. These movements are performed in a rhythmic way and can be
represented by specific music notation and rhythmic patterns.
132
(Grobler 1990: 60)
Suitable songs that have a distinctive walking beat and are appropriate for walking to music
are: London Bridge (although this song is in a 2/4 time signature, it can successfully be used
to perform walking movements on) (Aronoff, 1969: 83), Mary had a little lamb (Aronoff, 1969:
83), It’s raining (Aronoff, 1969: 83).
When incorporating these natural movements with music, instruments and other movement
activities, it is important to consider the ability of the child.
Three- to four-year-old preschoolers:

4/4 walking tempo, running movement, slow walk.
• Parents can introduce the 4/4 walking tempo to the child by playing the rhythmic
pattern on a drum, repeating the words out loud on every step and walking along as
they play the pattern. Initially, children will not be able to walk in time to the music.
• When they have become reasonably skilled in walking, other movements such as
running and the slow walk may be included in their activities. Children may find the
133
slow walking movement difficult to master, since they experience difficulty in shifting
their weight from one foot to the other and co-ordinating this movement with the
particular beat of a drum (Grobler, 1990: 60,61).
Four to five- year-old-preschoolers:

Slow walk, 4/4 walking, running, skipping, galloping.
• Preschoolers aged between four and five enjoy performing movements such as
walking, running and the slow walk. They have greater success than previously in
mastering these movements and in co-ordinating movements with the beat. They are
also ready for other, more difficult movements and skipping and galloping can be
introduced and demonstrated to them.
• When performing the skipping movement, children are required to alternate the left
and right foot. This requires that they perform a walk and a jump in turn with each foot.
• Children require a moderate degree of body control to be able to perform the galloping
movement. The gallop is usually performed with one foot in front of the other. Some
children may find it difficult to master, whereas others will experience no difficulty at all.
• It is important that children should not be pressurised or confused by having to perform

these natural movements in a particular way. Children are very creative and enjoy
opportunities to explore and experience music through their own natural movements. If
children are forced to perform movements in a prescribed way, artificial and forced
movements will result. This will negatively affect the child’s creativity and natural
response to musical experiences (Grobler, 1990: 61).
Five- to six-year-old preschoolers:

slow walk, 4/4 walking, running, skipping, galloping, rocking or swaying.
• Preschoolers between the ages of five and six should be given the opportunity to
perform and experiment with all the basic movements such as 4/4 walking, the slow
walk and running. At this age they are able to master skipping and galloping
movements.
134
• A new movement that can be introduced to them is the rocking or swaying

movement. These rocking or waltzing movements are best achieved when they are
executed from a fixed position. Children should remain stationary while swaying their
arms, or they can rock their bodies to and fro manner. It is better to avoid folk dances
that are written in a 3/4 time, since preschoolers have difficulty performing waltzing
movements with their feet (Grobler, 1990: 61).
5.1.3.2 (iii) Other movement concepts and variations
There are three different movement concepts and several variations to these concepts that
children can experience through simple movements. They are the concepts of space, time
and energy.
The concept of space:
Here shape, size, level, place, direction and the pathway are relevant.
• Shape: round, angular, bodily designs made with the body (Campbell & Scott-
Kassner, 1995: 192).
• Practical activities: Children can be asked to draw (using their hands, elbows, heads,
feet) a straight line, a curved line, a zigzag, a loop. They can then be asked to shape
their bodies into a box, triangle, an “A”, a “V” or the letter for their names. Children can
also be asked to move from one shape to the next within four beats, or eight beats.
Parents can join in this activity by tapping the beat on a tambourine (Author’s
suggestion).
• Size: large, small (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).
• Practical activities: Children can be asked to shape their bodies into the smallest ball
or the biggest tree they can be. Parents could tell children that they are going to play
music for them (children) to run/walk/skip to the music. Whenever the music stops,
children must pretend that they have to hide away from the parent by trying to shape
their bodies into the smallest ball. Parents can use two different instruments to signal to
children when they have to take a small shape (a snail) or be as big as a tree. For
135
example, when the cymbal is struck, the child becomes a tree and when the triangle is
struck, the child becomes a small snail (Author’s suggestion).
• Level: high, middle, low (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).
• Practical activities: Children can be asked to pretend to be walking high, low or

medium high. They should then alternate between high and low. Other locomotor
movements can be used to explore the concept of levels of space. An instrument such
as a piano or recorder can be used to play high, low or middle notes. Children have to
listen to the level of the sounds and move their bodies in a way suited to the different
levels (Author’s suggestion).
• Place: in place, through space (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).
• Practical activities: With marching music being played, children can be asked to walk to
the music. Parents can alternate the children's walking by asking them to walk on the
spot and then to walk around the room. An instrument such as a hand drum can be
used as signal when children must walk through the space (Author’s suggestion).
• Children can stand inside a hoop to perform particular movements without stepping
outside the hoop. They could be directed to sing and perform action songs without
stepping outside the circle. When the same movements or songs are repeated, they
can be encouraged to use as much space as possible in a creative way (Author’s
suggestion).
• Direction: forward, backward, sideways, turning (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995:
192).
• Practical activities: Children can be asked to walk forwards, backwards and sideways
towards the door and the windows. Other locomotor movements can be used to
explore the concept of direction in space (Author’s suggestion).
• Pathway: straight, curving (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).
• Practical activities: Children can be asked to create their own pathways and to walk
their own path without touching anyone. They could pretend to be walking through a
forest (curving) or along a railway track (straight). Suitable music can be played in
accompaniment. Parents could play songs about trains or atmospheric music with birds
136
chirping and the gentle sounds of a stream of water, to create the appropriate
atmosphere (Author’s suggestion).
The Concept of Time:

Pulse, duration, force, accent and tempo are dealt with under the heading of Time.
• Pulse: beat (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).

• Practical activities: Parents can choose a piece of music with a prominent beat and ask
children to walk to the basic pulse of the music (Author’s suggestion).
• Duration: long, short (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).

• Practical activities: Parents can play a single, long note on a cymbal or triangle and
ask children to move with the sound until it has faded away. A single, short note can be
played on a pair of wooden sticks and the child be instructed to move with every short
note. Children can pretend that they are bunnies and that they have to hop on every
short note that they hear (Author’s suggestion).
• Accent: force (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).

• Practical activities: Parents can repeat a simple walking or running rhythm on a
tambourine and accentuate a certain note of the pattern. Children can be asked to walk
to the rhythm and stamp their feet on the accentuated beat.
• Tempo: fast, slow.
• Practical activities: Children should be asked to move any body part in a fast, faster,
slow, slower, gradually faster or gradually slower way (Author’s suggestion).
The Concept of Energy:
The concept of energy is explored through movements involving attack, weight, flow and
strength.
• Attack: sharp, smooth (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).

137
• Practical activities: Parents should choose selections of music that are very rhythmic
and pieces that are very peaceful and dreamlike. When the parent plays the music,
children should be asked to perform movements that suit the music (Author’s
suggestion).
• Weight: light, heavy, strong, limp (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).
• Practical activities: Parents create their own stories around a topic or an animal that
interests them. Parents then encourage children to move like the specific animal in the
story would have moved. An elephant can walk heavily, while a mouse runs lightly
around the house. A body builder or Superman is very strong and can pick up very
heavy objects. A butterfly with broken wings is limp and unable to fly away (Author’s
suggestion).
• Flow: bound, free (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).

• Practical activities: Parents play a basic pulse on a tambourine and ask children to
walk to the beat. When the tambourine music stops, children must continue to walk in
the time of the basic beat. Another instrument can be used to signal that the children
have to stop suddenly or that they have to stop gradually. Children can pretend to be
wound-up toys. They have to walk and move to the music. Parents can gradually
reduce the volume of the music. As the volume fades, children gradually slow down
their movements (Author’s suggestion).
• Strength: tight, loose (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 192).

• Practical activities: Children are asked to pretend that they are clocks and that their
bodies are tightly wound. They are only able to move their arms with the ticking of the
clock. At the end of the story the clock breaks into a hundred bits and pieces and falls
to the ground. Suitable music for this activity is The Syncopated Clock by Leroy
Anderson (Author’s suggestion).
138
5.1.3.3 Practical Movement Activities
5.1.3.3 (i) Important aspects to consider when presenting practical movement activities
It is important that the following aspects be considered when planning and presenting practical
movement activities:
• There should always be enough space in the room for children to move around freely.
All objects and furniture that might be in the way or into which the children might bump,
should be removed (Grobler, 1990: 69);
• Children should not wear shoes or socks when performing movement activities. Loose
garments (jackets or jerseys) that might hamper or inhibit free and spontaneous
movements should always be removed;
• The teacher or parent should also wear comfortable clothes in which it is easy to move
freely and soft, flat shoes;
• Teachers should avoid long introductions and giving too many instructions before
letting the children perform the movements;
• Children should be able to move freely around the room in any direction that they
choose and not be forced to walk or move in circle or row formation;
• It requires some self-confidence for the children to participate in movement activities.

Some children might choose not to join their friends, and prefer to observe others doing
these movement activities. They will enjoy the activity, in spite of not participating
actively. Their wishes should be respected and they should never be forced to
participate. When they are ready, they will join the others in movement activities
(Grobler, 1990: 70);
• Children should be taught first to listen to a music selection, to think about what they
have heard and then to move around to the music;
• The teacher should always use praise and compliments as rewards for the children’s
attempts to perform movements (Grobler, 1990: 71).
139
5.1.3.4 (ii) Movement activities centred on the self:
• Parents can play instrumental sounds that will motivate the children to respond to
movement. Children can be asked to respond with certain parts of their bodies only.
Questions that parents can use to guide the child’s response to the sounds should be
along the line of: “Can you make your head/fingers/shoulders/feet dance? “ Parents
can imitate children’s movements on a tambourine. Every time the child’s foot touches
the floor, the parent taps the tambourine. Depending on the child’s choice of
movement, the resulting walking pattern may be even or uneven.
• Parents can play a selection of music to which the child could move. Whenever the
music stops, the child has to find the funniest or most interesting way of coming to a
stop.
• Children can be encouraged to move to sustained sounds with smooth, legato

movements. Parents can choose music that expresses a smooth idea, such as The
Swan from Carnival of the Animals by Saint-Saëns. Children can be given paper cups
filled with water and asked to move around holding the cup while the music plays. This
will require smooth movements to avoid spills. They could also be instructed to carry
the cup up high, low or in the middle. They can even be allowed to drink their water and
then to perform the same smooth movements as before, but without the cup. The same
music selection can be repeated.
• Parents can create a variety of songs and short sounds on different instruments.
Children have to respond to these contrasting sounds with movement (Andress, 1980:
24-27).
5.1.3.4 (iii) Movement activities based on the use of imagery
• Children can be asked to pretend that they are marionettes and that they have to lift a
body part every time they hear a single accentuated beat on the drum. Parents can
instruct the “marionette” through a rhyme about which action to do and parents can
strike a loud beat on the drum after each instruction.
For example:
140
• Children have to pretend that they are butterflies inside a cocoon. Parents can choose
music that builds up to a climax such as “Morning” from Grieg. Children have to curl up
in their little cocoon and pretend that they are sleeping. Parents can talk to children
through the butterfly story. When the music reaches its climax, the butterfly bursts out
of its cocoon and spreads its wings. The same activity can be undertaken using single
instruments to accompany the child’s movements. When the cymbal is struck, the
butterfly bursts out of its cocoon. Another suitable exercise is for children to pretend
that they are flower seeds that grow into beautiful plants (Andress, 1980: 27,32).
5.1.3.3 (iv) Movement activities based on the transition to patterned movement
• Suggest that children pretend to be walking to town, visiting a friend or playing in a

park. While they walk, parents can imitate their walking and movements on a
tambourine.
• If there is a larger group of children, they can imitate and try to match one child’s
walking. Each child should be given an opportunity to lead and be imitated by others
(Andress, 1980: 33-34).
• Sticks or objects can be placed on the floor and children asked to step/hop/skip/jump
over it. Parents match sound to children’s movements as they step/hop/skip/jump over
the sticks (Andress, 1980: 34).
• Parents can play imitation games with children. Children pretend that they are looking
in a mirror and the parent acts as the reflection. Children could perform movements for
parents to imitate and then be reversed for children to imitate the parents’ movements.
Suitable music or sounds that will encourage particular movements should be added to
this activity. Leroy Anderson, for example, wrote fun filled music such as Plink, Plank,
Plunk and Jazz Legato (Addendum A: The Typewriter by Leroy Anderson), which
would suit this activity (Andress, 1980: 35).
141
5.1.3.3 (v) Movement activities based on responses to an underlying beat
• Parents could sing a clapping song such as the Afrikaans Ons almal klap nou hande
(Addendum A: 60 Gewildste Kinderliedjies Volume 1) or the English Clap your Hands
to let children clap to the beat and do all the actions along with them. These songs are
good choices because they indicate exactly where and when the children have to
perform the actions (Andress, 1980: 36).
• Children can be encouraged to step to sounds and after sounds. They can pretend that
they have to step on raindrops while parents play a simple rhythm followed by silence
on a triangle. Children should be asked to step when they hear the triangle. The same
patterns can be repeated for children to “step on the raindrops” after they have heard
the sounds.
• Children can be given large beach balls to bounce. They should be told to give a step
and then bounce the ball once. The pattern will be: step, bounce, step, bounce.
Parents could play a half-note pattern on a cymbal and for every step of the child. The
“bounce” action is to establish a feeling of the underlying second and fourth beats.
(Andress, 1980: 38).
5.1.3.4 (vi) Movement activities in relation to the underlying beat
Once children have experienced and practised moving to the underlying beat, they can be
helped to understand that sounds can be shorter or longer than this basic underlying beat. An
enjoyable activity to illustrate this concept involves asking children to perform a basic beat
using body percussion. They can clap their hands and pat their knees alternatively and create
a steady 4-pulse beat (clap – pat - clap - pat)., They could rhythmically chant sentences or
rhymes while continuing this pattern A suitable example is: "My name is (Bet-ty), what is your
name?" (Andress, 1980: 40).
142
Another activity has parents playing echo clapping games with children. One child, or a
parent, can clap the basic beat or play it on an instrument, while a specific rhythmic pattern is
clapped along with the basic beat. The child has to imitate the pattern while the beat continues
to be played. This activity can be expanded and varied by parents adding rhythmic chanting to
their specific rhythm patterns. The child therefore will have to imitate the clapping as well as
the chanting and combine all with the basic underlying beat (Andress, 1980: 42).
A simple song such as London Bridge is falling down can be used to initiate movements in
relation to the basic underlying beat. Firstly encourage the children to sing the song while
walking to the basic beat. During the second exercise they can be asked to sing the words of
the song while clapping rhythmically. The first two activities can then be combined in a final
and third activity. They will therefore be walking to the basic beat, clapping their hands and
singing the words of London Bridge at the same time.
143
(Andress, 1980: 43)
5.1.3.3 (vii) Movement activities based on dance
Well-known Afrikaans folk songs can be used to encourage children to perform movements
and dances. An Afrikaans example such as Afrikaners is plesierig (FAK Sangbundel, 1979:
344) can be sung and performed by preschoolers. They can hold hands while standing in a
circle and perform stepping movements towards the middle of the circle and backwards for the
first part of the song (Afrikaners is plesierig dit kan julle glo. Hulle hou van partytjies en dan
maak hulle so). When they start to sing the second part of the song, they can take a partner
and perform the movements that the words of the song suggest (Eers draai die ou vroutjie en
dan draai haar ou man. En dan vat hy om haar lyfie en dan draai hulle saam) (Author’s
suggestion)
Other suitable songs are:
Afrikaans example: Dansliedjie (FAK Sangbundel, 1979: 437);
English examples: Paw Paw Patch (De Kock & Van Blerk, 1998:119)
One in the middle (Haines & Gerber 1980: 92);
Xhosa example: "Ibhabhathane elincinane" (The little butterfly) (Gunzburg 1987: 6)

144
5.1.3.3 (viii) Body percussion
Young children have the potential to use their bodies as musical instruments. They are able to
produce various, delightful sounds with their bodies, such as: clapping, tapping, snapping,
stamping, as well as the patting of body parts such as the shoulders, head, elbows, knees and
stomach (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 218).
Children at play can be very creative and often create their own, unique body-percussion
pieces. They are able to learn, enhance their rhythm skills and increase their vocabulary of
internalised rhythms through imitation of body-percussion sounds (Campbell & Scott-Kassner,
1995: 218, 220).
Exercises using body-percussion can help to prepare children to play on percussion, non-
pitched rhythm and barred instruments. A simple rhythm pattern or ostinato can be patted on
their laps. This will later enable them to play the same pattern on a pair of wooden sticks or a
drum and then they will feel rewarded for having mastered it through body-percussion and
being able to play the same pattern on an instrument (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 220).
Grobler (1990: 62) mentions four types of body percussion that can be done by children.
(a) Clapping of hands: Children of all ages always enjoy this simple activity. They can sit
or stand while performing clapping movements. When accompanying themselves with
clapping while singing a song or chanting speech patterns, children should be encouraged to
clap using only two fingers on the palm of their hand. By doing this, the clapping will be softer
and the words of the song and speech patterns will be heard clearly.
(b) Knee Slapping: In knee slapping children slap the palms of their hands on their thighs
just above the knee. This movement can be performed while sitting or standing, with both
hands simultaneously or by alternating the hands.
(c) Stamping of feet: This movement activity produces sounds when the sole of the foot is
stamped on the ground in an accentuated movement. Children can perform this activity while
sitting or standing, but toddlers might have difficulty balancing themselves while standing.
145
When seated, both feet can be stamped simultaneously or children can alternate their feet.
(Grobler, 1990: 63)
(d) Clapping of fingers: This movement of clapping or snapping of the thumb and middle
finger is very difficult for young toddlers and often only older preschoolers are able to perform
this activity. Children should, however, be encouraged to do this movement anyway as a
gesture or sign, even if they are not able to produce the sound. They can do the movement
with their dominant hand only or with both hands if they are able to do so (Grobler, 1990: 63).
5.1.3.3 (ix) Rhythmic speech patterns
The use of rhythmic speech patterns is part of the Orff approach and is regarded as a way of
helping children increase their sense of rhythm. The first speech patterns that young children
can use while clapping a speech rhythm, involve using and chanting their own names. Once
children master this activity, their surnames or names of other children can be combined to
create new rhythmic phrases. (Grobler, 1990: 64,65)
The activity can be expanded by using words in speech patterns that are about themes that
children love, for example: car models, chocolates, sweets, famous children’s movies,
characters, fruits and vegetables or just nonsense rhymes. Nursery rhymes can also be used
and children can accompany their speech patterns with other body percussion movements or
even simple rhythm instruments (Grobler, 1990: 66)
5.1.3.3(x) Action Songs and dances
Although performing action songs and dances form part of singing skills, rhythmic movements
can be combined with these singing activities. Children can sing well-known action songs with
appropriate movements and can even use body percussion (clapping, stamping) to
rhythmically interpret the phrases of the songs. With dances, children can illustrate music
concepts such as binary form (AB) or tertiary form (ABA) by singing the songs and performing
different movements at each different section. Jingle Bells is a song in binary form and
children can run around for the A part (Dashing through the snow...). For the B part (Jingle
bells...) children can slap their knees in the speech rhythm of the song. Examples of songs
146
and recordings in tertiary form are The Birdie Song (The Best Party Album in the world...ever)
(Grobler, 1990: 68).
5.1.3.3 (xi) Free and Creative Movements
During this activity children can be instructed to first listen to a particular selection of music
and then to interpret the music with their own choice of free and creative movements.
This activity can only be successful if children have acquired a basic framework of possible
rhythmic movements that they can use. With these kinds of movements, the choice of suitable
and appropriate music is important. Always start with well-known music that the children have
listened to previously. Music with a happy and cheerful character, as well as music with fast
and slow sections within one song, can be used for children to perform accompanying
spontaneous and free movements. These activities can be enhanced and movements
encouraged by letting the children wear bells around their ankles, as well as by using simple
props such as ribbons and scarves (Grobler, 1990: 68,69)
Popular songs to which children love to move which usually are cheerful and have a suitable
tempo are In the Jungle from Mango Groove (Addendum A) and songs by the Soweto String
Quartet (Addendum A).
5.1.4 Instrumental play
In early childhood instruments and instrumental playing can be introduced informally and
formally to young children.
5.1.4.1 Informal introduction and activities for instrumental play
Although music learning can occur without any equipment except the parent’s, teacher’s and
children’s voices, good quality instruments provide a new dimension to the child’s
understanding of sound. The playing of instruments provides the child with sensory
information from which musical concepts are formed. Informal instrumental play helps children
to develop eye-hand co-ordination and fine motor skills, is a medium of self-expression and
provides pleasure. Classroom instruments can be classified as non-pitched percussive,
pitched percussive, melodic and chordal accompanying instruments.
147
A list of rhythm instruments includes the following: rhythm drums of various sizes, rhythm
sticks, sand blocks, woodblocks, tambourines, claves, maracas, guiros, finger cymbals,
gongs, jingle bells, cowbells.
A list of pitched instruments includes the following: Resonator bells or tone bars, Xylophones,
Metallophones, Glockenspiels, Recorders.
A list of melodic and chordal instruments includes the following: Autoharp and Guitar
The child goes through musical motor developmental stages and is able to handle certain
instruments and master specific instrumental techniques during these developmental stages.
Children younger than two are able to do the following movements: rocking, nodding,
swaying, grasping and gripping of objects. Suitable instruments and instrumental techniques
for children of this age are rattles (shaking technique) and jingle bells (shaking technique)
Two- and three-year-old toddlers are able to achieve short periods of rhythmic regularity.
Suitable instruments and instrumental techniques for children of this age are hand drums
(hand tapping technique) and sticks (striking technique) (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995:
219).
Three- and four-year-old toddlers are able to achieve longer periods of rhythmic regularity,
are sensitive to pulse and able to sway their arms. Suitable instruments and instrumental
techniques for this age are claves (striking technique), sticks (rubbing and striking technique),
woodblocks (striking and rubbing with a mallet technique), sand blocks (rubbing technique),
tambourine (shaking and striking technique), guirro (rubbing technique), maracas (shaking
technique), gong (striking with a mallet technique), and the cowbell (striking with a mallet
technique) (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 219).
Five- and six-year-old preschoolers are able to maintain a pulse, alternate their hands and
perform basic eye-hand co-ordination. Suitable instruments and instrumental techniques for
148
children of this age are finger cymbals (striking rim to rim technique), bongo drums (hand
striking technique), timpani (striking with a mallet technique), cymbals (striking technique),
triangles (striking with a mallet technique), and the keyboard (playing with one hand)
These classroom instruments can be used to teach different orchestrations or to help children
to play in time with music. These instruments can also be used to encourage children to
explore the world of sound, the different tone qualities and expression potential of each
instrument, as well to acquire the skill of controlling such instruments (Aronoff, 1969: 45).
5.1.4.2 Formal Instrumental Teaching
Parents usually have a few questions they frequently ask when it concerns their children and
formal instrumental teaching. These frequently asked questions, such as when a child should
start with formal music lessons, which attributes a good early childhood music teacher should
have, what the role of the parent in daily practising should be, as well as how to choose the
correct instrument for the child, will be discussed in the next section.
5.1.4.2 (i) When should your child start formal music lessons?
In early childhood, it is advisable to rather let toddlers and preschoolers enrol for early
childhood music programmes. Such programmes offer group experiences and a variety of
listening, movement, rhythm, singing and instrumental activities for children. Creativity and
imaginative responses are encouraged in these classes and lessons will always contain short-
and long-term musical goals (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 14).
The teachers of these early childhood programmes are able to assess when preschoolers are
ready to start more structured or formal music experiences. Factors that teachers consider are
whether the child is mature enough to start formal learning, whether they exhibit good
concentration and attention span skills, whether they are physically able to master an
instrument and if they will be able to coordinate their small and large muscles (Machover &
Uszler, 1996: 14).
149
The advantage of starting formal music lessons for preschoolers at a young age is that they
are very eager and enthusiastic about music and learning. They love to repeat exercises and
usually have the required patience for repeating them. Preschoolers have strong rhythmic
skills and are keen listeners to music. They do not have inhibitions when they have to perform
in front of others and are very spontaneous (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 14).
Traditionally, children entering their first grade are considered to be ready to start formal
music lessons. Children at this age are eager to learn, are very literal and exact about rules
and procedures and have more control in muscle co-ordination (Machover & Uszler, 1996:
42).
Music lessons for shy children can prove to be very helpful for their self-esteem and might
even provide them with the individual attention that they might have missed in the bigger
school environment. Music lessons with a supportive teacher who views the child as a unique
individual will give children an opportunity to experience a time where only they, as individuals,
are of importance and this will help to improve their feelings of self-worth (Machover & Uszler,
1996: 43).
5.1.4.2 (ii) Which attributes should a good early childhood music teacher have?
Good early childhood teachers have the following attributes:

• They are well-trained;
• They have a degree in music or music education (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 20);
• They value music highly and will recognise the importance of introducing music to
children at a very young age;
• They will be confident musicians in their own right and will always be eager to improve
and enrich themselves with new music or communication skills;
• They have a love and respect for children;
• They are able to interact with toddlers and music in a playful and fun manner. (MENC
(a) [s.a])
• They have a love and passion for music;
• They show enthusiasm and warmth toward children;
• They have self-discipline;
150
• They are good storytellers;

• They have a sense of the dramatic;
• They are able to change the pace quickly;
• They have the ability to praise.
• They are good at group management;
• They have performance skills in instrument-specific programmes;
• They have an ability to sing, dance and improvise in movement programmes
(Machover & Uszler, 1996: 20).
Effective early childhood teachers furthermore exhibit the following desired personal
attributes:
• They are willing to invest time and effort in getting to know their children. They involve
themselves in the interests, needs and desires of children and they respect each child
as an individual;
• They always model the social and musical behaviours that they want to teach.
• They smile, laugh, play with and enjoy children. They also have and maintain a sense
of humour;
• They know the interests of children and plan musical experiences around it;
• They provide children with enough time and opportunities for individual musical
experiences;
• They are aware of the child’s developmental stages (musical, social, physical, and
cognitive). They realise that a child cannot learn a skill or develop a concept that is not
appropriate for their stage of development;
• They realise the importance of success and that the musical learning environment
should be success-laden. They always plan music experiences from which a child
learns to succeed;
• They realise and acknowledge that children learn at their own pace and in unique
ways. They realise that the process of music making is more important than the
musical product. Praising the process is just as important to them as praising the
product;
151
• They constantly evaluate their planning, lessons and attitudes. They strive to become
more effective human beings, are willing to make necessary changes and adjust to the
child’s needs (McDonald & Simons, 1989: 75).
A well-qualified music teacher for your child for formal music lessons should have the
following attributes and qualifications:
• A love of teaching;
• A degree in music (minimum: bachelor’s);
• Experience in performance;
• Experience in teaching;
• Interpersonal skills;
• Diagnostic skills;
• Knowledge of learning and varied learning styles;
• A well-equipped studio;
• Acquaintance with a wide variety of music literature;
• Membership of local or national professional societies;
• Possible certification by a professional society;
• Possible additional training in pedagogy (the art of teaching) or a combination
performance/pedagogy degree;
• Possible training in specialties to prepare them for work with preschoolers, the gifted,
or those with special needs;
• Possible affiliations with a community arts school (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 209).
5.1.4.2 (iii) The role of the parent in daily practising
It is important for parents to realise that practising a musical instrument is a learned skill.
Young children, therefore, need their parents to support and help them with their practising
and mastering of this important skill. The following guidelines may be valuable for parents who
want to help their children in practising and mastering an instrument.
152
• Parents should encourage their children to practise every day and add practising into
their children’s daily routine in an enjoyable way. Even on very busy days five minutes
of practising is better than no practising at all.
Machover and Uszler (1996: 29) quote Suzuki as saying, “You practise on the days
you eat.”
• Parents should help their children to plan their practising times and the tasks that
they have to complete. These tasks should be planned one at a time and be varied
to keep the child interested and motivated. Colourful charts, stickers and fun
decorations can be used to reward children when they finish a task. Such colourful
and fun charts will motivate children to practise and achieve their goals.
• It is important that the child should not be disturbed or interrupted by other siblings,
family members, television or any other interruptions when practising.
• Parents may provide companionship for their children when they are practising.
Practising can be very lonely and children enjoy the company and support of their
parents.
• Parents should praise their children frequently with positive and truthful praise.
Children can be praised for their efforts, their good posture or for knowing the
correct notes or fingering.
• Parents should be thoughtful, enthusiastic and appreciative when listening to their
children’s practising and the music.
• With wonderful technologies available such as video recordings, audio or CD
recordings, parents can record their children’s efforts and monitor their progress.
These recordings will be treasured one day by parents as well children.
• Children can be motivated to practise by rewarding them with treats. Successful
practising or repetition of a song can be rewarded with small candies, stars, raisins,
tokens or anything of value to the child.
• Young children can be encouraged to practise and perform by lining up the child’s
favourite toys as an audience. This will add an element of fun and fantasy to the
child’s practising (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 29).
153
• When children are not eager to repeat particular problematic passages or

techniques, parents could play card games to encourage them to repeat these
parts. The child has to pick a card and repeat the passage or exercise as many
times as the card indicates. Practising will then become a game full of fun.
• Parents who are able to play an instrument could join their children by
accompanying them on the instrument. Children will enjoy such family music
making and having a parent as a musical partner.
• Children could be rewarded or receive special privileges when they exhibit daily,
regular and quality practising.
• Parents could arrange that their child plays a duet with a friend. Children
experience duets with friends as fun and exciting and enjoy the companionship of a
partner.
• Parents could play a game with their children by asking the child to pretend that he
or she is the teacher and that the parent is the student. The child should explain or
demonstrate to the parent how a particular song or skill is performed (Machover &
Uszler, 1996: 30).
There are actions that the parent should refrain from when practising with their
children:
• Parents should never scream or threaten their children when practising;
• Parents should not expect or ask their children to practise when their friends are
visiting or when something exciting is happening at home;
• Parents should not force children to practise when they themselves are tired or
the child is tired or irritable;
• Parents should not make the child’s practising session too long or too difficult;
• Parents should never criticise the child’s practising or playing without adding
positive praise;
• Parents should never compare the child’s musical skills and abilities with that of
a sibling;
• Parents should never say “later” or keep postponing practising; this usually
leads to no practising at all (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 30).
154
5.1.4.2 (iv) Choosing the correct instrument for the child
“Finding an instrument for your child is like helping him find a friend” (Machover & Uszler,
1996: 164).
Finding and choosing the correct instrument for a child is a very important and difficult task.
Children’s taste in music and musical instruments are very personal and differ considerably
from one child to another (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 164).
The child’s age is a factor that should always be considered when choosing an instrument for
a child. Certain mental and physical abilities unfortunately limit the choice in instruments if
children are younger than six. It is important that the child should be able to hold, reach and
handle the instrument with ease and comfort. Instruments like the tuba or double bass are
therefore too large for a child of this age. The child should, furthermore, be able to produce
sound on the instrument of his/her choice in the correct way required by the instrument.
Certain brass instruments require a specific lip technique or lung power to be able to produce
sound correctly. These techniques are simply too difficult to master for a child under the age
of six and such an instrument would therefore be an inappropriate choice.
Children of such young age, however, are very insistent about playing certain instruments and
they often are strongly drawn to an instrument they love. This can be used as a good indicator
of what kind of instrument to choose for the child, since such highly motivated and insistent
children usually tend to persevere and will overcome most obstacles just to be able to play
their favourite instrument (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 164, 165).
Parents should try to trust their child’s instinct and intuition about an instrument and should be
aware of their own motivation and personal taste in musical instruments when they encourage
their child to choose an instrument (Cuttietta, 2001: 71,73).
Young children at this age, however, are still easily influenced by their parents and trust their
parents to give them the correct guidance, support and help. Children younger than six years
who are uncertain about which instrument they would like to play or do not indicate a special
interest in a specific instrument, should rather be enrolled in music and movement classes for
preschoolers (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 164, 165).
155
Children older than six are much bigger and stronger than before and are able to concentrate
for longer periods of time. They are also able to take more responsibility when it comes to
practising and will be able to master nearly any kind of instrument with the help of a
professional teacher. Many instruments, furthermore, are available in smaller sizes and
parents could buy or rent these smaller-sized instruments for younger children (Machover &
Uszler, 1996: 165, 166).
Other factors that parents should consider and questions that they should ask when choosing
instruments concern whether the physical features of the instrument actually match the
physical ability of the child and whether the instrument will suit the child. A further factor to
consider is the way in which the instrument is played. Some require blowing or bowing and
parents should ask themselves whether or not their child would enjoy this particular kind of
activity.
Thirdly, certain instruments require that children play in different setups. Although all
instruments can be played as solo instruments, some simply work better in an orchestra.
Playing in an orchestra requires a certain environment and group practising, while some
children might prefer to work and practise on their own (Machover & Uszler, 1996: 167).
Parents should always encourage children to choose instruments for musical reasons and not
for social reasons. Factors such as peer pressure do influence children’s choice of
instruments, whether in a positive or negative manner. Parents should try to accept and
respect their child’s choice, but at the same time offer guidance and help the child to make
good and positive choices (Cuttietta, 2001: 74).
Parents should also ensure that they are able to afford the cost of the instrument and the
lessons, but should not be ruled solely by financial considerations. They should consider
renting the correct instrument from a music store rather than purchasing it immediately, as it is
important to allow children to choose and also to change from one instrument to another.
Purchasing a second-hand instrument impulsively could be problematic. Parents need some
background and knowledge to be able to detect whether an instrument has faults. Buying a
new, expensive instrument right from the start, on the other hand, will make it more difficult for
the child to change from one instrument to another, as most good quality instruments are very
156
expensive. It is also important that the child should upgraded to a better quality instrument
when her or his technique improves, Parents should always encourage children to choose
instruments for musical reasons and not for social reasons (Cuttietta, 2001: 74, 75).
5.1.5 Criteria used by the author for selecting music and other resources for Addendum A
and Addendum B
In section 5.1.2.2 on page 114 of this thesis guidelines are given and discussed that should be
used when selecting children’s songs for young children. The author used these guidelines in
her own selection of music for Addendum B. These guidelines were also used when the
author selected music and songs that are featured on CD’s and DVD’s in Addendum A. The
specific guidelines that the author chose to use were:
• that the character of children’s songs should be simple, genuine and sincere, without
being artificial; childlike and never childish (McLachlan, 1986: 9).
• that children’s songs should never be too long and that the verses should be short.
• that the vocal range used in the song should never be too wide and should be within
the range of the D (above middle C) and the D an octave higher.
• that songs for toddlers younger than five should consist of two, three or four tones.
• that songs for preschoolers aged five to seven can range between five to eight tones in
a song.
• that the melody of sung children’s songs should always be simple and natural and
must enable young children to sing easily without accompaniment. that songs should
be rhythmically simple and the rhythm of the melody should always be interwoven with
the natural rhythm and accents of the lyrics. Notes that are held for a long period of
time, tied notes and unexpected syncopation were avoided (McLachlan, 1986: 10).
• that the text or lyrics of children’s songs should always be written in a manner that
allows the child to identify with and relate to it. Lyrics with a lot of repetitions, sound
157
words and nonsense rhymes were used. Songs with lyrics that are too sentimental,
affectionate, artificial or childish were avoided (McLachlan, 1986: 11).
• that the children’s songs had a specific atmosphere and character when it came to the
particular melody and lyrics and that the character of both the melody and the lyrics
complemented each other (McLachlan, 1986: 11).
• that children would show their enjoyment of these chosen songs by singing it eagerly,
spontaneously and correctly on their own without accompaniment (McLachlan, 1986:
12).
Other criteria that the author used for choosing songs in Addendum A and B were to
choose songs that the author has used successfully over the last 13 years. These chosen
songs are about topics that children love and are interested in. The sections about nursery
rhymes and mother goose songs are part of our rich, cultural music heritage and was
chosen so that children in the future would know these songs and be able to preserve this
heritage. The criteria for choosing Afrikaans and Xhosa songs were the same as those for
the English songs. With the Xhosa songs the number of resources available with songs
are extremely limited and the author used the resources available to her.
The criteria for choosing books were to choose resources that were available at South African
retail outlets and libraries. These books are very practical, informative, illustrative, colourful
and written in an informal and uncomplicated manner.
Criteria for choosing music-instruction software in Addendum A were that the skills and
concepts taught in these programmes would be suitable for the child in early childhood
development. The author chose software programmes that had interesting graphics and
musical illustrations. The quality of the sound was evaluated, as well as how easily a child
could be able to interact with the programme. The author also looked at the kind of feedback
and comments that children would hear when they used a programme and selected
programmes where these comments were positive and done in a fun manner, especially
when the child had made a mistake. Other criteria used were to determine if parents would be
able to afford these software programmes and whether these programmes could be used in a
158
variety of instructional settings such as individual use, small group use and even in a whole-
class set-up (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 299).
The author’s selection of suitable software and web sites are aimed in supplying parents and
educators with links where they can contact major music societies and associations
worldwide; to aid them with encyclopaedias that they can use when they have difficulty with
music terminology and concepts and to supply them with sites that will give them practical
advice and lessons on how to master specific instruments.
5.2 Conclusion
The four basic skills of listening, singing, rhythmic bodily movements and instrumental play
are discussed in this chapter. Practical activities and songs for use towards learning and
teaching each skill are suggested for parents and educators and practical guidelines that
parents can use when they are teaching and helping children to experience a specific skill are
also given throughout.
Concerning the development of listening skills, three types (auditive awareness, auditive
discrimination and memory and sequencing) are discussed, together with practical activities
that parents can use to develop these skills.
The development of children’s singing skills is presented through a discussion of the different
types of singing and songs that are age appropriate are suggested.
Different types of movement suited to different ages and how these movements develop
sequentially are discussed with regard to the development of children’s rhythmic bodily
movements. Practical activities for application towards the development of these movements
are also presented.
Appropriate instruments for introduction to children who are ready to start playing an
instrument are discussed. Instruments and techniques that children need to develop when
using these instruments, and guidance concerning the appropriate age for the introduction of
a specific instrument also receive attention, while the frequently asked questions about when
children should start formal lessons are answered. The attributes of good early childhood
159
teachers are listed to guide parents who are looking for a teacher to teach their children and
the important role that parents play in daily practising, motivating the child and choosing an
instrument, is discussed.
160
CHAPTER 6: Summary of research
The author has divided the research for this thesis into five main categories or chapters,
namely: The importance of music education for children; When to start music education with
the child; Guidelines and information to help parents to make a positive contribution to the
child's early musical development and music education; Basic music skills and activities to
develop these skills for the child's early musical development.
The chapters dealing with the four categories discuss research findings and practical
examples and activities that parents and educators can use to help the children to develop
musically.
In the second chapter, eleven main reasons for the importance of music and music education
for every child's development are listed and discussed. The frequently asked question of "Why
should parents provide music education for their children?" is answered and findings identified
through scientific research are given to support and emphasise these eleven reasons.
The question of "When should parents start music education with the child?" is answered in
the third chapter. The focus is on the extensive research and resulting findings concerning
foetal development and prenatal stimulation. The important role of the parent is emphasised in
this chapter and practical suggestions for prenatal activities that can benefit the unborn baby
are given.
In the fourth chapter the musical and overall development of the child is dealt with according
to different developmental stages and ages. The development of the child in each stage is
discussed and practical activities to support the child’s development and learning in each is
presented. The second part of the chapter focuses on the structural elements of music.
Practical activities that parents and educators can use in helping children to experience these
elements meaningfully are presented. The importance of musical play, different types of
musical play and how children play in different developmental phases are discussed. This is
also enhanced with practical suggestions to guide parents and educators when they join
children in play.
161
The four basic music skills (listening, singing, rhythmical body movements and instrumental
play) are addressed in Chapter 5. This discussion is also accompanied by suggestions for
relevant practical activities to develop these skills.
The research report is concluded with sections of practical value (Addendum A and B). These
addenda supply information about resources for practical application, such as compact disks,
books, DVDs, films and websites that parents can consult or purchase (Addendum A).
Material listed in Addendum A for use in early childhood education is readily available in South
Africa.
Addendum B provides a repertoire of songs for the preschool child. Extensive lists of
Afrikaans, English and Xhosa songs are included. These songs are alphabetically arranged in
different categories to make it easier for parents and educators to use.
The research that has been done has provided information for future use in the form of more
practical and more informal guidelines with popular appeal for parents and educators. A
possible publication could also contain the sheet music of songs mentioned in the research.
Further research could also be undertaken on different aspects of this thesis. South African
singing games and other musical games have, for instance, been identified by the author as
possible fields for further investigation. Currently there are very few publications available with
authentic South African singing and music games. Most games used in South Africa are from
other countries such as America. There is a rich heritage of songs and chants that the older
South African generation used to use when playing hop scotch games, rope skipping games
and clapping games during their break time at school. All of these chants and songs have not
been documented and this could provide a possible area for research in the future.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
162
ANDRESS, B. 1980. Music Experiences in Early Childhood. New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
ARMSTRONG, T. 1987. In their own way: Discovering and Encouraging your Child’s
Personal Learning Style. Los Angeles: Jeremy P. Tarcher.
ARMSTRONG, T. 1993. Seven Kinds of Smart. New York: Plume.
ARMSTRONG, T. 1994. Multiple Intelligences in the Classroom. Alexandria, Virginia: ASCD.
ARONOFF, F.W. 1969. Music and Young Children. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston,
Inc.
ARONSON, E. & ROSENBLOOM, S. 1971. Space perception in early infancy: perception

within a common auditory-visual space. Science, 1971, 172(3988): 1161-1163.
AYRES, A.J. 1983. Sensory Integration and the Child. Los Angeles, California: Western
Psychological Services.
BARRY, R. 1970. Sangstukkies vir Kindertjies. Pretoria: J.L. Van Schaik.
BAZILCHUK, N. 1998. Introducing your Child to Music. Music lessons for young children
should be short and fun. [Online]. Available:
http://family.go.com/features/family_1998_04/kidv48music/kidv48music.html [20/12/99].
BEGLEY, S. 1996. Your Child’s Brain. Newsweek, February 19, 1996. [Online]. Available:
http://infantelligence.html [20/12/99].
BERGETHON, B., BOARDMAN MESKE, E. & MONTGOMERY, J. 1986. Musical Growth in

the Elementary School, Fifth Edition. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
BOEREE, C.G. [s.a.]. Jean Piaget 1896-1980. [Online].

Available: http://webspace.ship.edu/cgboer/piaget.html. [31/1/07]
BOXILL, E. H. 1985. Music Therapy for the Developmentally disabled. Pro-Ed, Inc. 1985.
[Online]. Available: http://what is music therapy- pavaroti.htm. [3/4/99].
CAMPBELL, P.S. & SCOTT-KASSNER, C. 1995. Music in Childhood: From Preschool

through the Elementary Grades. New York: Schirmer Books.
CANADIAN ASSOCIATION FOR MUSIC THERAPY. What Music Therapy is. [Online].
Available: http: //www.musictherapy.ca/mt/what. html [18/7/2000].
CANADIAN ASSOCIATION FOR MUSIC THERAPY. Who Music Therapy May be useful for.
[Online]. Available: http://www.musictherapy.ca/mt/who.html. [18/7/00].
163
CANADIAN ASSOCIATION FOR MUSIC THERAPY. [online]. How Music is used

therapeutically. [Online]. Available: http:// www.musictherapy.ca/mt/how.html [18/07/00].
COCK, S. & WOOD, M. 1995. Spot on Songbook. London: Penguin Group.
CUTIETTA, R.A. 2001. Raising Musical Kids, A Guide for Parents. New York: Oxford
University Press.
DE KOCK, D. & VAN BLERK, B. 1998. Sound Start. Song Book. Pretoria: Kagiso Publishers
DE VILLIERS, M. 1934. Ritmiese Kinderliedjies. Kaapstad: H.A.U.M.
DE WAAL, A. & LUYT, F. 1954. Kleuterdeuntjies. Johannesburg: Carstens-De Waal Musiek.
DORMAN, P.E. 1990. The importance of musical play centres for young children. General
Music Today, 3 (3): 15-17.
DOXEY, C. & WRIGHT, C. 1990. An exporatory study of children’s musical ability. Early
Childhood Research Quarterly 59 (3) 425-440.
ENOCH, A. Music for the Young Child. [Online]. Available:

http://www.family.go.com/local/carp.html [20/12/99].
FAK SANGBUNDEL. 1979. Hartman, A.C., De Villiers, D.I.C., Cillié, G.G., Lamprecht, C. E.,
Malan, J. P., McLachlan, P., Pauw, J. J., Van der Westhuizen, H. P. & Van den Berg, A.M.
(eds.). Johannesburg: Federasie van Afrikaanse Kultuurvereniginge.
FONG, B.C. & RESNICK, M. R. 1980. The Child: Development Through Adolescence.
California: Benjamin/Cummings.
Gallo record company: bernies@gallo.co.za
GARDNER, H. 1983. Frames of Mind. London: Heinemann.
GARDNER, H. 1993. Multiple Intelligences: The Theory in Practise. New York: Basic
Books.
GESELL, A. & FRANCES, L. [s.a.] Child Development. Harper and Brothers. New York.
GRASSROOTS EDUCARE TRUST. 1990. Songs sung by South African Children. Athlone:
Grassroots Educare Trust.
GREENBERG M. 1979. Your Children Need Music. Prentice-Hall. Englewood Cliffs: New
Jersey.
GROBLER, R. 1986. Musiek in die Preprimêre skool. Durban: Butterworths.
GROBLER, R. 1990. Music in the preprimary school. Durban: Butterworths.

164
(Die) GROOT SANGBOEK IN VOLLE KLEUR: MEER AS 200 VOLKS- EN

KINDERLIEDERE/ MET VOLKLEUR ILLUSTRASIES DEUT TOMI UNGERER EN IAN
LUSTED; AFRIKAANSE VERWERKINGS DEUR PHILIP DE VOS EN ANDER. 1994.
Kaapstad: Rubicon.
GUNZBURG, C. 1987. Kusasa Sivuka. In the morning we wake up. 38 Xhosa songs collected
and transcribed.
HAINES, B.J.E. & GERBER, L.L. 1980. Leading Young Children to Music: A Resource Book
for Teachers. Ohio, Charles E. Merril.
HENDRIKSE, S., ENDEMAN, H. & JACOBS, T. 1992. Musiek vir Juniors. Pretoria:
Academica.
HOEXTER, A. 1934. Kinderliedjies en speletjies. Songs and games for Children (in Afrikaans
and English). England: W.Heffer & Sons.
HYMAN, D. 1980. My Eie Liedjies. Vir stem en slaginstrumente. Johannesburg: Dalro.
JOHNSON, M.B. 1951. One-a-week. Fifty-two Nursery rhymes graded for Training College
students and teachers of young children. London: J. Curwen & Sons.
KRAMER, M., CHAMORRO, I., GREEN, D. & KNUDTSON, F. 1975. Extra tactile stimulation
of the premature infant. Nursing Research, 1975, 24, 324-334.
KROMHOUT, J. 1970. Kinderwysies. Pretoria: J.L. Van Schaik.
KROMHOUT, J. 1972. Kinderliedjies. Pretoria: J.L. Van Schaik.
LAMPRECHT, F. 1954. Liedjies vir klein mensies. Pretoria: J.L. Van Schaik.
LECANUET, J. 1996. Prenatal auditory experience. Musical Beginnings: Origins and

Development of Musical Competence. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
LEE, E. The Benefits of Music Lessons. Music and music appreciation can open the minds
and hearts of children. [Online]. Available:
http://www.family2.go.com/raisingkids/child/dev.html [21/2/01].
LEVINOWITZ, L. M. 1999. The Importance of Music in Early Childhood. Music Educators

Journal , Vol . L36: 17-18.
LEVINOWITZ, L. M. 1999. What’s happening in Early Childhood Music education? Teaching

Music, October 1999.
LITTLETON, D. 1998. Music learning and child's play. General Music Today, 12 (I): 8-15.
LOCHNER, H. & DIPPENAAR, E. [s.a.]. Liedjies vir ons Kleintjies. 27 Kindertuinliedjies.

Kaapstad: Maskew Miller.
165
LOOFT, W.R. 1972. Egocentrism and social interaction across the life span. Psychological
Bulletin, 1972, 78(2): 76.
Look & Listen Music stores www.lookandlisten.com [16/10/2006]
LOUW, D.A., GERDES, L.C. & MEYER, W.F. 1985. Menslike Ontwikkeling. Pretoria: HAUM
Opvoedkundige Uitgewery.
MACHOVER, W. & USZLER, M. 1996. Sound Choices: Guiding Your Child’s Musical
Experiences. New York: Oxford University Press.
MACKONOCHIE, A. 1998. The complete book of pregnancy & babycare. London: Hermes
House.
MAKE WAY FOR BABY. (a). Prenatal and Postnatal Stimulation Research. An Open Window
to the World.
[Online]. Available: http://www.2bparent.com/research.html [28/01/00].
MAKE WAY FOR BABY. COM. (b). Pregnancy and Prenatal Stimulation. [Online]. Available:
http://www.2bparent.com/prenatal-stimulation.html [28/01/00].
McDONALD, D.T. & SIMONS, G.M. 1989. Musical Growth and Development. New York:
Schirmer Books, Macmillan.
McLACHLAN, P. 1980. Notepret: Handleiding vir die lees van musieknotasie. Boek 2.
Goodwood: Nasionale Opvoedkundige Uitgewery.
McLACHLAN, P. 1986. Klasonderrig in musiek: 'n Handleiding vir onderwysers. Kaapstad:
Nasou.
MENC. 1992. Position Statement on Early Childhood Education. [Online]. Available:

http://www.menc.org/information/prek12/echild.html [8/6/00].
MENC. [s.a.]. The K - 12 National Standards, Pre K Standards, and what they mean to music
educators. [Online] Available: http://www.menc.org/information.html [8/06/00].
MOOG, H. 1976. The Musical Experience of the Preschool Child. London: Scott & Co.
MORIN, F.L. 2001. Cultivating Music Play: The need for changed teaching practise. General
Music Today, 14 (2): 24-29.
MORRISON, B. 1998. Researchers find active music making expands the brain. [Online].
Available: http://www.amc-music.com [16/04/99].
MüLLER-ZüRICH, P.L. 1982. ‘n Histories - Vergelykende Ondersoek na die aandeel van
musiek in die wording van die kind. Universiteit van Pretoria, Ongepubliseerde doktorale
proefskrif.
Musica Music Stores www.musica.com [16/10/2006]

166
Music Improves reasoning in preschool Children: Advancing Music Skills: Aptitude and
achievement. [s.a.].
[Online] Available: http://www.pionet.net/~hub7/contestents.html . [01/04/99].
Music Makes You Smarter: Researchers find that active music making expands the brain.
[s.a.]. [Online] Available: http://Guavaberry Books.Music Makes You Smarter.html [16/4/99]
Music Makes You Smarter: Why we teach music. [s.a.]. [Online]

Available: http://Guavaberry Books.Music Makes You Smarter.htm [16/4/99].
NAXOS CATALOGUE 2001. [s.a.] [Online] Available: www.naxos.com [16/10/2006]
NEAL, M. 1968. Vestibular stimulation and developmental behaviour of the small premature
infant. Nursing Research Report, 1968, 3, 1-5.
NELSON, E.L. 1989. Everybody Sing and Dance. Cleveland, Ohio: Instructor Books.
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES MAGAZINE. 2000. Upcoming Conference to explore

the Biological Foundations of Music. [Online] Available:
http://www.nyas.org/publications/update.asp?ID=17 [4/10/2006]
NORTHCOTE, S., WHITTAKER, W.G., WISHART, J. & WISEMEN, H. 1984. Sangfees. 25

liedere vir kinders. Woorde deur Philip McLachlan. Goodwood: Nasionale Opvoedkundige
Uitgewery.
NYE, V. 1979. Music for the young children. Dubuque, Iowa: Brown.
OPPERMAN, D.J. 1981. Kleuterverseboek. Kaapstad: Tafelberg Uitgewers
PIENAAR, R. & MALAN, P. 1975(a). Sing Saam Speel Saam , Boek 1. Kaapstad: Juta.
PIENAAR, R. & MALAN, P. 1975(b). Sing Saam Speel Saam , Boek 2. Kaapstad: Juta.
PITTS, L., GLENN, M., WATTERS, L.E. 1949. The Kindergarten Book. Our Singing World.
Boston: Ginn.
PONICK, F.S. 1999. What's happening in Early Childhood Music Education? Teaching Music,
Vol.7 (7): 30-37.
POTGIETER, H.M. & JORDAAN, B. 1984. Singgoed vir kleingoed. Sing along, little ones.
Pretoria: Academica.
PRELUDE MUSIC THERAPY HOME PAGE. Music Therapy Information [Online] Available:
http://musictherapy-prelude-defenition.html [3/4/99].
RAUSCHER, F., SHAW, G., & KYE, K. 1993. Music and Spatial task performance. Nature
365: 611.
167
RAUSCHER, F., SHAW, G., LEVINE, L. & KYE, K. 1994. Music and Spatial task
performance: a causal relationship (paper presented at the American Psychological
Association annual conference, Los Angeles, August, 1994.
RAUSCHER, F., SHAW, G., LEVINE, L., WRIGHT, E., DENNIS, W. & NEWCOMB, R. 1997.
Music Training causes long-term enhancement of preschool children’s spatial-temporal
reasoning, Neurological Research 19, number 1 (1997): 2-8
RICE, R. Neurophysiological development in premature infants following stimulation.

Developmental Psychology, 1977, 13, 69-76.
RUDOLPH, A. 1985. Volksangbundel van Anna Rudolph. Johannesburg: DALRO.
SCOTT-KASSNER, C. 1999. Developing teachers for Early Childhood programmes. Music

Educators Journal, Vol. L36: 19-25.
SENIOR, L. & HOPKINS, K. 1998. Growing up with a Smile. Florida Hills: Smile Education
Systems.
SMITHRIN, K.L. 1997. Free musical play in early childhood. Canadian Journal of Research in
Music Education 3 (4): 17-24.
STERN, I. [s.a.]. Afrikaanse Sangspeletjies. Kaapstad: Nasionale Pers.
SZABO, M. 1999. Early Music Experience and Musical Development. General Music Today,
Spring, 17-19.
TARNOWSKI, S.M. & LECLERC, J. 1994. Musical play of preschoolers and teacher-child
interaction. Update: Applications of Research in Music Education, 13 (1): 9-16.
TARNOWSKI, S.M. 1999. Musical Play and Young Children. Music Educators Journal, July
1999, 26-29.
The BabyPlus Company.com. 1999. A Heartbeat Away from Blissful Birth. Hospital Doctor.
London, l March 1990. [Online] Available: http://The BabyPlus company.Table of Contents-
Media Articles. html [28/01/00].
The BabyPlus Company.com.1999. Prenatal Brain Cell Death. [Online] Available:

http://www.asoundbeginning.net/SiteMap.html[11/02/99].
The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook [s.a.]. London: Usborne.
THOMPSON, K.P. 1999. Internet Resources for General Music. Music Educators Journal, 86
(3): 30-36.
VAN WYK, H. 1991. The Orchestral Encounter. A Music Lover’s Guide. Pretoria: Viva la
Musica.
168
WEINBERGER, N. M. 1999. Lessons of the Music Womb. [Online] Available:

http://Music is Lessons of the Music Womb.html[30/3/99] and http://MuSICAResearch Notes:
V VI, I 4, Winter 1999. html [4/5/00].
WHALEY, L.F., & WONG, D.L. 1987. Nursing care if Infants and Children. St. Louis: The C.V.
Mosby Company.
WHEELER, O. [s.a.]. Sing Mother Goose. New York: E.P. Dutton.
WHITWELL, G. E. The Importance of Prenatal Sound and Music. [Online] Available:

http://Life Before Birth: Prenatal Sound and Music.html [26/5/99].
ADDENDUM A:
AVAILABLE RESOURCES FOR EARLY CHILDHOOD MUSIC EDUCATION

AND MUSIC EXPERIENCES
169
A.1 Compact disk catalogue
This section comprises lists of suitable compact disks for children. These lists are classified
according to instruments, music eras and themes that children will find interesting. Most of
these compact disks were collected and successfully used by the author over a period of
twelve years. The author’s aim with these lists is to make it easier for parents and educators
to see which resources are readily available on the South African market and thereby to assist
them in deciding which disks they want to purchase and use. New technology and Internet
resources make it possible for parents and educators to order any compact disk or book
through sites such as www.amazon.com and www.kalahari.net
The criteria used for selecting compact disks was to choose disks that were readily available
in South African retail outlets. Although all Compacvt diks can nowadays be ordered online,
there are still a high percentage of parents and educators who are not able to order online or
who prefer to buy at retail outlets. Most of the Compacts disks in thei saddendum have been
collected and sucessfully used by the author for more than thirteen years. The choice of
English compact disks and DVD’s are endless and every month there are new releases
available. Afrikaans compacts disks and DVD’s fo children are however very limited and the
author listed most of the availble disks. Some of the recordings on these Afrikaans disks are
not of good quality, but the idea is that parents use these disks as a medium to learn the
words and tunes of songs. Parenst and educators should then try to sing and teach children
these songs by actively singing it to them.
A.1.1 Specific instruments, music eras, composers and other mixed

Compilations
170
An informative and concise booklet is currently being distributed by the NAXOS record
company. This booklet is updated annually and consists of all the compact disks
distributed and promoted by this company. Compact disks are arranged in categories
based on the different instruments of the orchestra, composers, music eras, and other
compilation categories. Each disk is fully identified by its title, serial number, music
selections, conductor and performing artists.
Interesting categories in the NAXOS series are:
Compilations of the best and most popular works of composers of Western

Art music
Medieval Music (circa 600 - circa 1200)
Renaissance Music (circa 1400 - circa 1550)
The Baroque Era (circa 1600 - circa 1750)
Western Vocal Art Music: Vocal and Choral music and Opera
Orchestral Works
Jazz
Music for Special Occasions (Christmas celebrations and weddings)
Music from Films
“Easy Listening Music”
Music from other cultures
NAXOS also has a website on which their catalogue can be viewed electronically and
other enquiries can be made. The complete NAXOS series is distributed in South
Africa by Gallo Record Company. These compact disks are sold at leading South
African CD retailers such as MUSICA and Look & Listen. Relevant web addresses
are:
Naxos: www.naxos.com
MUSICA: www.musica.com
Look & Listen: www.lookandlisten.com
Gallo Record Company: bernies@gallo.co.za
171
A.1.2 Suitable recordings of ballets, dances and marches that encourage imaginative
listening and dramatisation by children
1. Suitable recordings: Ballet
Selection Composer Resource
Ballet of the Unhatched Chicks Moussorgsky Andress (1980: 184)

from Pictures at an Exhibition
Bydlo from Pictures at an Moussorgsky Andress (1980: 184)
Exhibition
Dance of the Mosquito Liadov Andress (1980: 184)
Fairies and Giants from Wand of Elgar Andress (1980: 184)

Youth Suite Number 1
Flight of the Bumblebee Rimsky-Korsakov Andress (1980: 184)
Golliwog’s cakewalk from Debussy Andress (1980: 184)

Children’s Corner Suite
Hall of the Mountain King from Grieg Andress (1980: 184)
Peer Gynt Suite
Little train from Once Upon a Time Donaldson Andress (1980: 184)
Suite
Little White Donkey Ibert Andress (1980: 184)
March of the Royal Lion from Saint-Säens Andress (1980: 184)

Carnival of the Animals
Three bears Coates Andress (1980: 184)
Viennese Musical Clock from Hary Kodàly Andress (1980: 184)

Janos Suite
2. Suitable recordings: Marches
Funeral March of the Marionettes Gounod Andress (1980: 185)
March from The Love of Three Prokofiev Andress (1980: 185)

Oranges
March from The Nutcracker Suite Tchaikovsky Andress (1980: 185)
March of the Dwarfs Grieg Andress (1980: 185)
March of the Little Lead Soldiers Pierne Andress (1980: 185)
March of the Siamese Children Rodgers Andress (1980: 185)

from The King and I
March of the Toys from Babes in Herbert Andress (1980: 185)
Toyland
Parade Ibert Andress (1980: 185)
172
3. Suitable recordings: Dances
Anitra’s dance from Peer Gynt Grieg Andress (1980: 185)

Suite
Dance of the Sugarplum Fairy Tchaikovsky Andress (1980: 185)
from The Nutcracker Suite
Dance of the Toy Flutes from The Tchaikovsky Andress (1980: 185)
Nutcracker Suite
Petite Ballerina from Ballet Suite Shostakovich Andress (1980: 185)
Number 1
Skater’s Waltz Waldteufel Andress (1980: 185)
Sleeping Beauty Waltz from Tchaikovsky Andress (1980: 185)

Sleeping Beauty Ballet
Waltz of the Doll from Coppélia Delibes Andress (1980: 185)
Waltz of the Flowers from The Tchaikovsky Andress (1980: 185)

Nutcracker Suite
4. Suitable recordings for Quiet
Listening
Air for G String from Suite Number Bach Andress (1980: 186)
3 on D Major
Aquarium from Carnival of the Saint-Säens Andress (1980: 186)
Animals
Barcarolle from Tales of Hoffman Offenbach Andress (1980: 186)
Berceuse from The Firebird Suite Stravinsky Andress (1980: 186)
Clair de Lune Debussy Andress (1980: 186)
Lullaby Brahms Andress (1980: 186)
Morning from Peer Gynt Suite Grieg Andress (1980: 186)
The Swan from Carnival of the Saint-Säens Andress (1980: 186)

Animals
Träumerei Schumann Andress (1980: 186)
5. Suitable recordings of Music

Stories and other additional
listening
Andante from Surprise Symphony Haydn Andress (1980: 187)
Carnival of the Animals Saint-Säens Andress (1980: 187)
Children’s Corner Suite Debussy Andress (1980: 187)

173
Children’s Symphony, Third McDonald Andress (1980: 187)

Movement
Mother Goose Suite Ravel Andress (1980: 187)
Nutcracker Suite Tchaikovsky Andress (1980: 187)
Peer Gynt Suite Grieg Andress (1980: 187)
Peter and the Wolf Prokofiev Andress (1980: 187)
Toy Symphony Haydn Andress (1980: 187)
A.1.3 Other individual compositions with a focus on a specific instrument or

combinations of instruments
The book, “The Orchestral Encounter: A Music Lover’s Guide” by Hester Van Wyk (1991) is a
beautifully illustrated and informative book about musical instruments. This book contains
extensive lists of music pieces and compositions to which children and adults can listen if
they want to listen to a specific instrument.
Composer Resource
A.1.3.1 Stringed Instruments
THE VIOLIN
Works for unaccompanied violin
Partitas J. S. Bach Van Wyk (1991: 15)
Works for Violin and Orchestra
The Four Seasons Vivaldi Van Wyk (1991: 15)
Violin solos in orchestral pieces
Swan Lake Ballet Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 19)
THE VIOLA
Works for Viola and Orchestra

Grand Sonata for Viola and Niccolo Paganini Van Wyk (1991: 19)
Orchestra
THE CELLO
Works for Unaccompanied Cello
174
Suites J. S. Bach Van Wyk (1991: 21)

Works for Cello and Piano
The Swan from Carnival of the Saint-Saëns Van Wyk (1991: 21)
Animals
Works for Cello and Orchestra
Cello Concerto Haydn Van Wyk (1991: 21)
Orchestral Works of importance for
Cello
Wilhelm Tell Overture, 5 Cellos Rossini Van Wyk (1991: 21)
THE DOUBLE BASS
Works for Double Bass and
Accompaniment
The Elephant from Carnival of the Saint-Saëns Van Wyk (1991: 23)
Animals
A.1.3.2 The Plucked Instruments
THE CLASSICAL GUITAR

Works for Solo Guitar
Cavatina Stanley Myers (Author’s own selection)
THE HARP
Orchestral extracts of importance for
Harp
Young Persons’ Guide to the Britten Van Wyk (1991: 27,28)
Orchestra
Nutcracker Ballet, Waltz of the Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 27,28)
Flowers
Swan Lake Ballet, Cadenza
Swan Lake Ballet, Cadenza Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 27,28)
A.1.3.3 The Woodwind Instruments

THE FLUTE
Works for Flute and Orchestra
Flute Concertos Mozart Van Wyk (1991: 31)

Concerto for Flute and Harp Mozart Van Wyk (1991: 31)
Orchestral Solos for Flute
Pavane Faure Van Wyk (1991: 31,32)
175
The use of the alto and bass Flutes

in the Orchestra
The Planets Holst Van Wyk (1991: 31,32)
THE PICCOLO
Orchestral Solos for piccolo
The Sleeping Beauty Ballet, Canary Thaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 32)
Variation
Symphony No. 4 Thaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 32)
THE ALTO AND BASS FLUTES

The use of the alto and bass Flutes
in the Orchestra
The Planets Holst Van Wyk (1991: 32)
THE OBOE
Works for Oboe and Orchestra
Oboe Concerto Mozart Van Wyk (1991: 34)
Orchestral Solos for Oboe
Scene from Swan Lake, Introduction Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 34,35)
to Act 2
The Duck from Peter and Wolf Prokofiev Van Wyk (1991: 34,35)
THE COR ANGLAIS

(ENGLISH HORN)
Orchestral Solos for Cor anglais
William Tell Overture Rossini Van Wyk (1991: 35)
THE CLARINET
Works for Solo Clarinet
Harlequin Cahuzac Van Wyk (1991: 38)
Orchestral Solos for Clarinet
Opening of Rhapsody in Blue Gershwin Van Wyk (1991: 39)
The Cat from Peter and the Wolf Prokofiev Author’s own selection
THE BASS CLARINET

Orchestral Solos for Bass Clarinet
Nutcracker ballet, Dance of the Sugar Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 39)
Plum Fairy
176
THE SMALL CLARINET
Orchestral solos for E-flat Clarinet

Bolero Ravel Van Wyk (1991: 40)
THE BASSOON
Orchestral Solos for Bassoon
The Grandfather from Peter and the Prokofiev Van Wyk (1991: 42)
Wolf
Peer Gynt, In the Hall of the Grieg Van Wyk (1991: 42)
Mountain King
THE SAXOPHONE
Orchestral Solos for Saxophone
Pictures at an Exhibition, The Old Mussorgsky Van Wyk (1991: 45)
Castle
A.1.3.4 The Brass Instruments
THE FRENCH HORN

Works for French Horn and
Orchestra
Horn Concerto Haydn Van Wyk (1991: 48)
Orchestral Solos for French Horn
Nutcracker, Waltz of the Flowers Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 48)
THE TRUMPET
Orchestral Works of importance
for Trumpet
Aida, Grand March Verdi Van Wyk (1991: 50,51)
THE TROMBONE
Works for Trombone & Orchestra
Concerto for trombone and military Rimsky-Korsakov Van Wyk (1991: 52)
orchestra
ORCHESTRAL SOLOS FOR
TROMBONE
Piano concerto in G Ravel Van Wyk (1991: 52)
177
THE TUBA
Works for Tuba and Piano
A Children’s Suite: Effie the Elephant Wilder Van Wyk (1991: 54)
A.1.3.5 Percussion Instruments

MEMBRANOPHONES AND
IDIOPHONES
Orchestral works of importance for
Kettledrums
Symphony No. 4, 1st movement Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 57)
Glockenspiel
Nutcracker Suite, Chinese Dance Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 57,58)
The Sorcerer’s Apprentice Dukas Van Wyk (1991: 57,58)
The Aquarium from Carnival of the Saint-Saëns Van Wyk (1991: 57,58)
Animals
The Fossils from Carnival of the Saint-Saëns Van Wyk (1991: 57,58)
Animals
Works for Marimba and Orchestra
Concerto for marimba and Milhaud Van Wyk (1991: 58)
vibraphone
Vibraphone
Spring Symphony Britten Van Wyk (1991: 58)
Works of importance for Snare
Drums
Works of importance for the Bass
Drum
Storm from William Tell Overture Rossini Van Wyk (1991: 60)
Cymbals
Slavonic Dances Nos. 1 and 8 Dvorák Van Wyk (1991: 60)
the Gongs
The Planets Holst Van Wyk (1991: 60)
Orchestral works of importance
for Castanets
Swan Lake Ballet, First Intermezzo Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 61)
Sleigh Bells
178
Sleigh ride Leroy Anderson Author’s suggestion

Whip
Horse and Buggy Leroy Anderson Author’s suggestion
A.1.3.6 Keyboard Instruments
THE CELESTA
Orchestral Works featuring the
Celesta
Nutcracker Ballet, Sugar Plum Fairy Tchaikovsky Van Wyk (1991: 64)
A.1.4 Twentieth Century Popular Instrumental Music for Preschoolers
A.1.4.1 Mixed Classical Compilations

Classics for Children BMG Classics 09026-68131-2
Boston Pops and Arthur Fiedler
Classics for Children IMP Classics DPCD 1061

Jorge Luis Prats, Martino Tirimo, Royal
Philharmonic Orchestra, London Symphony
Orchestra
Frederick Fennell conducts the Mercury Living 432 013-2

music of Leroy Anderson
Hooked on Classics 2 CDs David Gresham CDDGR 1324

Louis Clark and The Royal Philharmonic Record Company
Orchestra
Majors for Minors: Baroque for Big Blu Music CDLITTLE06

Babies
Majors for Minors: Bee Gees for Big Blu Music CDLITTLE04
Babies
Majors for Minors: Classical Big Blu Music CDLITTLE01

Music Lullabies
Majors for Minors: Classical Big Blu Music CDLITTLE02

Music Nursery Rhymes
Majors for Minors: Christmas Big Blu Music CDLITTLE03

Classics for little Angels
Majors for Minors: Mother Big Blu Music CDLITTLE11

179
Nature
Majors for Minors: Mozart for Big Blu Music CDLITTLE09

Minors
Majors for Minors: Playtime and Big Blu Music CDLITTLE10

Bedtime with Bach
Majors for Minors: Strykers vir Big Blu Music CDLITTLE05

Snuiters
Afrikaanse kinder- en volkswysies
Christa Steyn
Majors for Minors: Symphony of Big Blu Music CDLITTLE08

Sleep
The Typewriter: Leroy Anderson BMG Music 09026680482

Favourites
Saint Louis Symphony Orchestra and
Leonard Slatkin
100 Best Classics (6 CD EMI Music CDELJ (SWFD)185

collection) These six compilations
are very good and has a wide
variety to listen to. Each CD has its
own name and style. They are
divided into relaxing, golden
classics, favourites, Vocal, spiritual
and uplifting sections. Parents can
for example choose the relaxing CD
when they want their children to
relax or go to sleep.
100 Classical Favourites This is a EMI Music FBUDCD001
good, affordable CD to start your
collection with and has a wide
variety of classical songs to listen
to.
180
A.1.4.2 Popular South African Instrumental and Vocal Music
In my African Dream Rhythm Safari Music CSRFCD 003

The Best of Johnny Clegg & Savuka
Best of Juluka/Savuka & Johnny SABC 3 Rhythm CSRMCD 152

Clegg Safari Music
Africa Calling Teal Records 2564626242

Various Artists
Traditional and Popular Music
The Best of Mango Groove Gallo record CDRED 667
Mango Groove Company
Popular
Millennia BMG Music CDCLL 7025
Soweto String Quartet Popular
Renaissance BMG Music CDBSP 7009

Soweto String Quartet
Popular
South African Souvenirs Universal Music LDGCD 1000

Original Artists
2 CDs containing Traditional and
Popular Music
Zebra Crossing BMG Music CDBSP 2031

Soweto String Quartet
Popular
Karoo Guitar Blues (CD and DVD) Blik Music BLIK 07

David Kramer DVD is BLIK11
A.1.4.3 Traditional South African

Instrumental and Vocal Music
Africa Calling Various Artists Teal Records 2564626242

Traditional and Popular Music
South African Souvenirs Original Universal Music LDGCD 1000

Artists
2 CD’s containing Traditional and
Popular Music
In my African Dream SABC 3 Rhythm Dream CSRFCD 003
The Best of Johnny Clegg & Savuka
Safari Music
181
Best of Juluka/Savuka & Johnny SABC 3 Rhythm CSRMCD 152

Clegg
Safari Music
A.1.4.4 Music Stories

Philharmonic Orchestra, London
Symphony Orchestra

The Typewriter: Leroy Anderson BMG Music 09026-68048-2

Favourites
Leonard Slatkin
Majors for Minors: Learning the Big Blu Music CDLITTLE07

Orchestra
Pieter en die Wolf en Die Gallo Record CDTGE24
Orkesgids vir Jongmense opus
Company
30
A.1.4.5 Music for imaginative listening

Philharmonic Orchestra, London Symphony
Orchestra
Cinderella and Sleeping Beauty NAXOS 8.554610

Sergey Prokofiev and Pyotr Ilyich
Tchaikovsky
Narrated by Brian Cant
Hooked on Classics David Gresham CDDGR 1324
Louis Clark and The Royal Philharmonic record Company
Orchestra
2 CD’s
Pieter en die Wolf en Gallo Record CDTGE 24
Die Orkesgids vir Jongmense Company
opus 30
182
Sergey Prokofiev en Benjamin Britten
The Typewriter: Leroy Anderson BMG Music 0926-68048-2

Favourites
Leonard Slatkin
A.1.5 Twentieth Century Popular Vocal Music for Preschoolers
6.1.5.1 Afrikaans
60 Beste Kinderliedjies Volume 1 Select Music SELKPCD 1013/A

3 CDs
60 Beste Kinderliedjies Volume 2 Select Music SELKPCD 1018

3 CDS
Carike in Kinderland 1 BMG Records Africa CDVAT 6123

Carike Keuzenkamp DVD DVAT 6164
Available on DVD

Carike Keuzenkamp DVD DVAT 6169
Available on DVD

Carike Keuzenkamp
Soon available on DVD
Gewildste Afrikaanse Teal Trutone Music DKCD 45

Kinderliedjies
56 Lekker saamsing liedjies vir die
kinders
Kammalielies Doris Brasch en Dawie Gallo Record CDGMP 40454
Couzyn Company
Sing liedjies van Betty Misheiker en Jan
Pohl
Kindertreffers vir die Langpad Select Music SELKPCD 1017
Lekkerluisterliedjies: Die Beste JONA CD 991

van Phyllis en maatjies Volume 1
(Pricecutters Toys en Baby Boom)
Olke Bolke Select Music SELKPCD 1014

Elizabeth Fourie
Reg vir groot skool Select Music SELKPCD 1030

Riana van Wyk
183
Sal jy dit glo?/Tingeling Gallo Record CDGRC 3480

Doris Brasch en Dawie Couzyn met Dan Company
Hill en sy Orkes
Tjokkerjol (Elizabeth Fourie Select Music SELKPCD 1002

Trippe Trappe Treffers Elizabeth Select Music SELKPCD 1001
Fourie
Wielie Walie Liedjies Magda van Select Music SELKPCD 1004

Biljon en Gert Van Tonder
A.1.5.2 English
Cedarmont Kids Classics: Sarepta Music BENCD0137

Toddler action songs
24 Classic Songs for toddlers
Cedarmont Kids Classics: Sarepta Music 84418-2221-2

Lullabies
15 Traditional and Christian Lullabies from
around the World

Preschool Songs
22 Classic Songs for Kids
Cedarmont Kids Classics: Silly Sarepta Music 84418-2220-2

Songs 18 Wholesome Fun Songs for
Kids

Toddler Tunes
25 Classic Songs for Toddlers
Pollywiggle/Polly Wolly Wog Gallo Record CDGRC B 31070

Doris Brasch Company
60 Best Loved Kiddies Hits Select Music SELKPCD 1026

Clamber Club-Traditional Action Gallo Record CDRPM 1759
Songs Company
A.1.6 Popular Gospel Music for Children
These Compact disks are all available from a good quality Christian bookshop such as
Lux Verbi (www.luxverbi.co.za) or any other major CD retail store such as Musica
(www.musica.co.za) or Look and Listen (www.lookandlisten.co.za). Lux Verbi has the
widest variety of gospel music available and specialises in gospel, compact disks,
DVDs and videos for children of all ages. Popular compact disks with English songs
184
are available in the Cedarmont Kids series. The most popular Afrikaans Christian
compact disks are:
Loflaaities 1 Jan de Wet MARD 367
Loflaaities 2 Jan de Wet MARD 124
Jan de Wet en die lofkleuters Jan de Wet MARD 267
Jan de Wet en die lofkleuters 1 Jan de Wet MARDVD 003

DVD
(Number 2 to be released in October
2006)
Oom Karolus & Lente sing Cor Uys CDBRT 343
bekende Jesus kinderliedjies
These CDs and DVDs are very popular among toddlers and even older children. Other
popular gospel music is produced by Cor Uys (Oom Karolus), with the two animation
characters, Doempels and Lente, and Simeon Hamman. The music and stories by
Oom Karolus and Lente are broadcast every morning on the Radio Pulpit (“Radio
Kansel”) radio station.
Bible songs (Cedarmont series) www.luxverbi.co.za or www.gospeldirect.co.za
Psalty Praise party (Psalty series) www.luxverbi.co.za
A.1.7 Lullabies
A.1.7.1 Instrumental
Lullabies and Dan Gibson CDG138

Butterflies: Exploring
Nature with Music
(Solitudes)
Majors for Minors: Big Blu Music CDLITTLE06
Baroque for Babies
Tracks 5, 6, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16
Classical Music
Lullabies
185

Mother Nature
Mozart for Minors
Tracks 9-14
Mozart for Minors
Tracks 9-14
Playtime and Bedtime
with Bach
Strykers vir Snuiters Christa Steyn
Afrikaanse kinder-en
volkswysies Christa
Steyn
Tracks 6, 11,15
A.1.7.2 Vocal
Baby Loves Classics Sarepta Music 83061 0564 2

Lullabies with Christian
lyrics sung to well
known classical
melodies
Dreamscape: Koch International 3-7433-2HI

Lullabies from around Classics
the World
Heidi Grant Murphy
and Aurèole Trio
A.1.8 Sounds from nature and peaceful atmospheric music
Deep Blue Rhapsody Christian and Didier GJ3607

(Global Journey) Lacroix
The Majesty of the
ocean reflected in the
beauty of music.
Orchestral melodies
blended with the
haunting cry of whale
song and dolphins
186
Lullabies and Dan Gibson CDG138

Butterflies: Exploring
Nature with Music
(Solitudes)
Mother Nature
A.2 Books
NAME AUTHOR ISBN NUMBER
Musiek. Ontdek die Ooggetuie reeks ISBN 1868122220

interessante wêreld van
musikale klank en die
buitengewone
verskeidenheid
instrumente wat dit
voortbring
The Orchestral Encounter. Hester Van Wyk ISBN 0-620-16267-8
A Music lover’s guide.
The Oxford First Kenneth and Valerie ISBN 0-19-314303-8

Companion to Music McLeish
The Music Pack (including Ron van der Meer and ISBN 0-679-43098-9
a 75 minute CD) Michael Berkeley
The Big Bass Drum. A Nancy Hellen ISBN 185292 159 5

moving pop-up song book
A.3 Films and DVDs

All these DVDs and CDs can be viewed at and ordered from the South African Musica retail
outlets and their website. www.musica.co.za or at Look & Listen music stores at
www.lookandlisten.co.za
A.3.1. Old Classics Catalogue number

Mary Poppins D00023DVDD
187
Fiddler on the roof 16164DVDF

Sound of Music 01051
Wizard of Oz Z265123
Annie 7055
A.3.2. Animation favourites and
educational DVDs
Beauty and the Beast 809274853029
Little Mermaid SAN2816DVD
Aristocats DC90DVDD
Lion King 505046659229
Barbie in the Nutcracker 8159
Barbie - Swan lake 8702
Cinderella 1 and 2 A4296DVDD
Barney’s Musical Scrapbook SHTD009
Sing and dance with Barney SHTD020
Moving and Grooving with Barney SHTD055
(www.barney.com)
More Barney songs SHTD-001
A.4 Web sites
A.4.1 Web resources for Early Childhood Music Education
American Music Conference International Service

www.amc-music.com
American Orff-Schulwerk Association

www.aosa.org
Children’s Music Web

www.childrensmusic.org
Dalcroze Society of America

www.dalcrozeusa.org/index.htm
188
Early Childhood News (The Journal of Professional Development)

www.earlychildhoodnews.com
ERIC Clearinghouse on Elementary and Early Childhood Education

www.ericeece.org
Idea Box: Early Childhood Education and Activity Resources

www.theideabox.com
Kindermusik
www.kindermusik.com
MENC- The National Association for Music Education

www.menc.org
Music for Little Folks

www.ur-net.com/music-little-folks
Musikgarten
www.musikgarten.org
Organisation of American Kodàly Educators

www.oake.org
National Association for the Education of Young Children (NAEYC)

www.naeyc.org
National Institute on Early Childhood Development and Education (US Department of

Education)
www.ed.gov/offices/OERI/ECI (Levinowitz 1999: 35)
A.4.2 Electronic Dictionaries and Encyclopaedias in Music
Music History 102

www.ipl.org/exhibit
Electronic Music Dictionary

www.unm.edu/~loritaf/pnorefsh.html#Dictionary
Glossary of Musical Forms

www.unm.edu/~pnorefsh.html#Glossary
Glossary of Musical Terms

www.hnh.com/mgloss.htm
Musical Categories
www.hnh.com/intro.htm#categories
189
Musical Instruments
www.hnh.com/intro.htm#instruments
MusicNet Encyclopedia
http://tqd.advanced.org/3306/cgi-bin/encyclopedia/encyclopedia.cgi
A.4.3 Internet Practise-and-Drill Sites for Music Learning
Name That Tune

http://library.advanced.org/3306/cgi-bin/tune/tune.cgi
Mrs. Lukow’s Page

www.geocites.com/Heartland/Ridge/6081/music.html
Can You Match the Sound? (Instruments of the Orchestra)

www.menc.org/guides/charguid/match/matgame1.htm
Puzzles for You (Instruments of the Orchestra)

www.indyorch.org/puzlpage.html
Energy in the Air: Sounds from an Orchestra

http: //tqjunior.advanced.org/5116/
A.4.4 Virtual Learning Centres
Index of Children’s Songs (Singing)

www.danmansmusic.com/childrens/
Kit Eakle’s Virtual Music Classroom (Singing)

http://cnet.unb.ca/achn/kodaly/koteach/resources/toc.html
MIDI’s for Kiddies: Songs for Children (Singing)

www.concentric.net/~Gamba/
Harmonica Page
www.inscorp.com/harmonica/childm.htm
Ted’s Guitar
http://members.aol.com/mathewsrfp/guitar.html
WholeNote (Guitar Lessons)

http://itp.nyu.edu/wholenote/lessons/lessdir.asp
Meet the Composer

www.unm.edu/~loritaf/pnokids.html#Meet the Composer
Composer of the Month

http://cnet.unb.ca/achn/kodaly/koteach/resources/compmonviv.html
190
NetRadio Jazz
www.netradio.net/jazz/
Music from Around the World

http: //library.advanced.org/11315/world.html
Gallery of Indonesian Songs

www.geocites.com/SoHo/1823/fr-anak.htm
Bali and Beyond

www.pacificnet.net/gamelan/
All that Jazz

http://L2L.ed.psu.edu/success/lessons/lesson5/ifac2%5Fl.htm
Band Basics
http: //L2L.ed.psu.edu/success/lessons/lesson11/hfac2%5Fl.htm
Fine Tuning
http: //L2Led.psu.edu/success/lessons/lesson7/hfac2%5Fl.htm
History of Jazz
http: //L2L.ed.psu.edu/success/lessons/lesson10/hfaa2%5Fl.htm
Jazz it Up
http: //L2L.ed.psu.edu/success/lessons/lesson11/hfac3%5Fl.htm
Rocking through the Ages

http://L2L.ed.psu.edu/success/lessons/lesson10/hfab1%5Fl.htm
(Thompson 1999: 31-36)
A.7 Computer Programmes
Everest Music Cyberversity: Designed by This South African

Music Theory Beginners Antoinette Hoek, programme is designed as
Programme and music Elma Britz and a first e-learning Music
colouring book for the young Jeanet Domingues. theory course and is
beginner. available in Afrikaans and
English. This programme
www.evcyberversity.co.za
can be used for toddlers as
well as older music
beginners. The programme
is very colourful, practical,
with fun quizzes, and tests
the child’s knowledge
throughout. All the
191
instruments of the
orchestra are introduced,
as well as simple notation,
and other basic theory
concepts. There are songs
that the children can sing
along too and it is designed
in such a way that children
can use and play with the
programme on their own.
Jumpstart: Music. Available This program makes

from extensive use of games
www.incredibleconnection.co.za through which children can
learn more about
instruments, notation,
rhythms and other aspects
of music. Fun games with
colourful animation
characters.
Orchestra. A personal Attica, EMI Classics and A very good CD Rom
Focus Essential program for adults and
guide with Sir Simon
Rattle children. It contains live
Attica, EMI Classics and Focus video footage of real
Essential instruments playing, as
well as interviews with
musicians. The program
concludes with a video of
the whole live orchestra
performing a classical
piece. The camera focuses
and zooms in on
instruments as they play
their solo parts. Excellent
teacher aid, especially as it
is not necessarily possible
to have the actual
instrument in the
classroom.
192
ADDENDUM B
SONG REPERTOIRE FOR THE PRESCHOOL CHILD
B.1 English Songs
B.1.1 Songs based on Nursery Rhymes and Mother Goose songs

A Ring o’ roses Johnson (1951: 25)
Aiken Drum Johnson (1951: 17)
Baa, baa, black sheep Johnson (1951: 45)
Baby Bunting Johnson (1951: 12,13)
Bye baby bunting Wheeler ([s.a.]: 48)
Cobbler, cobbler Wheeler ([s.a.]: 44)
Cock-a-doodle-doo Wheeler ([s.a.]: 36)
Curly Locks Wheeler ([s.a.]: 34)
Dance a baby, Diddy Johnson (1951: 12)
Diddle diddle dumpling Wheeler ([s.a.]: 60)
Doctor Foster Johnson (1951: 10)
Donkey, donkey, old and grey Wheeler ([s.a.]: 52)
Georgy Porgy Johnson (1951: 14)
Girls and Boys come out to play Johnson (1951: 29)
Goosey, goosey gander The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 7)
Handy Spandy Pitts et al. (1949: 70)
Hey, diddle, diddle Pitts et al. (1949: 69)
Hickety, Pickety, my black hen Wheeler ([s.a.]: 27)
Hickory, Dickory, Dock Johnson (1951: 27)
Hot Cross Buns Wheeler ([s.a.]: 18)
Humpty Dumpty Pitts et al. (1949: 68)
Hush-a-bye, Baby Johnson (1951: 18)
I Love little Pussy Wheeler ([s.a.]: 46)
I’m a little teapot The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 34)
193
Incy, Wincy Spider The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 31)
Jack be nimble Wheeler ([s.a.]: 29)
Jack and Jill Johnson (1951: 48)
Ladybird, ladybird Wheeler ([s.a.]: 22)
Little Polly Flinders Johnson (1951: 15)
Little Jack Horner Johnson (1951: 19)
Little Tommy Tucker Johnson (1951: 26)
Little Miss Muffet The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 43)
Little Bo-Peep Johnson (1951: 5)
Little Boy Blue The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 3)
Little Bo-Peep Wheeler ([s.a.]: 10)
Little Boy Blue Johnson (1951: 44,45)
Little Jack Horner Pitts et al. (1949: 68)
Little Polly Flinders Wheeler ([s.a.]: 28)
London Bridge Johnson (1951: 9)
Mary had a little lamb The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 38,39)
Once a saw a little bird Wheeler ([s.a.]: 21)
One, two, three, four, five The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 32)
Pat-a-cake, Pat-a-cake The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 36)
Pease Pudding Hot Johnson (1951: 4)
Polly put the kettle Wheeler ([s.a.]: 50)
Pussy Cat, Pussy Cat, where have you been? Johnson (1951: 42)
Rain, rain, go away Wheeler ([s.a.]: 54)
Ride a Cock Horse The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 21)
Ring-a-ring o’ Roses The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 20)
Rock-a-bye, Baby The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 14)
Rub-a-dub-dub The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 5)
See-saw, Margery Daw The Usborne Nursery Rhyme Songbook (1996: 15)
The Jolly Miller Johnson (1951: 8)
The Muffin Man page Johnson (1951: 10,11)
This little pig Wheeler ([s.a.]: 38)
Three Blind Mice Johnson (1951: 49)
To bed, to bed Wheeler ([s.a.]: 37)
194
Tom, Tom, the Piper’s son Wheeler ([s.a.]: 45)

Twinkle, twinkle little star Johnson (1951: 33)
What are little boys made of? Johnson (1951: 23)
B.1.2. English Action Songs and games
Annie works with one hammer Nelson (1989: 51)

Can you, can you Nelson (1989: 39)
Clap hands softly Haines & Gerber (1980: 58)
Clap, clap, clap your hands Haines & Gerber (1980: 59)
Come in, come in with me Nelson (1989: 115)
Elephants Nelson (1989: 101)
Follow, follow the leader Haines & Gerber (1980: 60)
Head and shoulders, knees and toes Nelson (1989: 55)
Hullabalooby Looby Loo Nelson (1989: 99)
I Love somebody Nelson (1989: 151)
I can be very small Nelson (1989: 43)
I’m putting my baby to sleep Nelson (1989: 71)
Jump in, jump out Nelson (1989: 109)
Let everyone clap hands with me Haines & Gerber (1980: 59)
Let everyone grin like me Nelson (1989: 103)
Little Bunny hop, hop, hop Nelson (1989: 65)
My name is Susie Q Nelson (1989: 121)
Noble Duke of York Nelson (1989: 49)
See, see, see Haines & Gerber (1980: 66)
Slide around so easily Nelson (1989: 105)
The Duck family Nelson (1989: 67)
The strong tugboat Nelson (1989: 85)
The Jack-in-the-box Haines & Gerber (1980: 69)
This is what I can do Haines & Gerber (1980: 60)
Tiptoe Haines & Gerber (1980: 70)
Trot, trot, trot Nelson (1989: 125)
We’ll all clap hands together Haines & Gerber (1980: 58)
195
We’re galloping on our ponies Nelson (1989: 79)

What does the clock in the hall say? Haines & Gerber (1980: 67)
What shall we do? Haines & Gerber (1980: 62)
When I’m tired, down I flop Nelson (1989: 57)
Who has a triangle Nelson (1989: 165)
Wriggledy Jiggledy song Nelson (1989: 77)
B.1.3 English Finger-play rhymes and chants

Clap your hands Haines & Gerber (1980: 49)
Five little squirrels Haines & Gerber (1980: 48)
Five little Jack o’ Lanterns Haines & Gerber (1980: 49)
Freight train Haines & Gerber (1980: 49)
Give a little whirl Haines & Gerber (1980: 46)
Here’s a bunny Haines & Gerber (1980: 47)
I see a ball Haines & Gerber (1980: 48)
Knock at the door Haines & Gerber (1980: 47)
Mother’s forks and knives Haines & Gerber (1980: 47)
B.1.4 Finger-play Songs:

Enjoy, little eyes, what you see Nelson (1989: 19)
Five little soldiers Nelson (1989: 17)
Five little ducks Nelson (1989: 25)
Me and you Nelson (1989: 15)
Our family Nelson (1989: 27)
Tap your fingers on your head Nelson (1989: 23)
Thumbkin says “I’ll dance and sing” Nelson (1989: 31)
Tommy thumbs up Haines & Gerber (1980: 60)
Who can it be Nelson (1989: 21)
196
B.1.5 Rhymes, chants and rhythmic speech patterns

Nursery rhymes can be used successfully, not only to sing, but for children to chant them
or speak them rhythmically. They are good examples of songs that can be used for
rhythmic speech patterns.
Baa, baa, Black sheep Haines & Gerber (1980: 45)

Hickory Dickory Dock Haines & Gerber (1980: 45)
Humpty Dumpty Haines & Gerber (1980: 45)
Pat a cake Haines & Gerber (1980: 44)
Ride a cock horse to Banbury Cross Haines & Gerber (1980: 43)
This is the way the ladies ride Haines & Gerber (1980: 44)
This little piggy Haines & Gerber (1980: 44)
To market Haines & Gerber (1980: 44)
Twinkle little star Haines & Gerber (1980: 44)
B.1.6 Counting and Counting-out songs
Counting Songs
Five little Chickadees Pitts et al. (1949: 37)
Here is the beehive Pitts et al. (1949: 37)
One, two, buckle my shoe Pitts et al. (1949: 36)
Two little birds Pitts et al. (1949: 36)
Counting out Song:

Eenie meenie gypsaleenie Haines & Gerber (1980: 51)
B.1.7 Greeting songs

Hello, everybody Haines & Gerber (1980: 63)
My name is Susie Q Nelson (1989: 121)
B.1.8 Singing games

A-hunting we will go Pitts et al. (1949: 42)
197
Cat and Mouse Pitts et al. (1949: 40)

Frog in the middle Pitts et al. (1949: 41)
Guessing game Pitts et al. (1949: 43)
I have a little cupboard Haines & Gerber (1980: 74)
If you’re happy Haines & Gerber (1980: 75)
Riding up and down Haines & Gerber (1980: 73)
Ring-around a Rosy Pitts et al. (1949: 38)
Round and round a circle Pitts et al. (1949: 39)
Round and round the village Pitts et al. (1949: 40)
Sally goes round the stars Pitts et al. (1949: 39)
Squirrels and trees Pitts et al. (1949: 41)
The farmer in the Dell Pitts et al. (1949: 43)
There were ten in the bed Haines & Gerber (1980: 72)
Three crows Haines & Gerber (1980: 78)
B.1.9 Action songs, circle singing games and songs in formation

Mouse, Mousie (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995:277)
Teddy Bear (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 196)
Ring around the rosie (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 196)
London Bridge (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 197)
Johnny works with one hammer (Campbell & Scott-Kassner, 1995: 195)
B.1.10 Songs in formation

Bluebird Haines & Gerber (1980: 88)
Bow, Bow, o Belinda Haines & Gerber (1980: 83)
Chook-ka-choo Haines & Gerber (1980: 82)
Circle round your zero Haines & Gerber (1980: 95)
Dance so merrily Haines & Gerber (1980: 89)
Here we come a-walking Haines & Gerber (1980: 87)
I’ve lost my little partner Haines & Gerber (1980: 90)
One in the middle Haines & Gerber (1980: 92)
One little duck Haines & Gerber (1980: 94)
Paw paw patch Haines & Gerber (1980: 98)
198
Sally goes round the sun Haines & Gerber (1980: 93)
The big ship sails Haines & Gerber (1980: 91)
We are partners Haines & Gerber (1980: 83)
B.1.11 Examples of three tone songs

Rain, rain Haines & Gerber (1980: 110)
Ring around the rosie Haines & Gerber (1980: 111)
Starlight, Starbright Haines & Gerber (1980: 110)
B.1.12. Call and response songs

As I looked out my window Haines & Gerber (1980: 112)
There’s someone living on a big high hill Haines & Gerber (1980: 114)
B.1.13. Songs for the young child

Hush you bye Haines & Gerber (1980: 128)
I have a dog Haines & Gerber (1980: 117)
Join hands all around the world Haines & Gerber (1980: 127)
Little red bird in the tree Haines & Gerber (1980: 124)
This is the time Haines & Gerber (1980: 123)
B.1.14 Songs illustrating musical elements

Here is a very good way Haines & Gerber (1980: 192,193)
High is where the birds go Haines & Gerber (1980: 161)
Low is like a tunnel Haines & Gerber (1980: 162)
See my pony Haines & Gerber (1980: 176,177)
We can sing Haines & Gerber (1980: 173)
B.1.15 Occasional songs

A little rabbit came to town Haines & Gerber (1980: 211)
Easter duck and Easter chick Pitts et al. (1949: 92)
Everybody ought to sing Haines & Gerber (1980: 212,213)
199
Greeting song Pitts et al. (1949: 82)

Happy Birthday Pitts et al. (1949: 72)
I am bunny pink ears Pitts et al. (1949: 92)
Jingle Bells Pitts et al. (1949: 82)
My Birthday is today Pitts et al. (1949: 71)
Red leaves and yellow seasons Haines & Gerber (1980: 203)
Santa’s Helpers Pitts et al. (1949: 83)
Softly Haines & Gerber (1980: 214)
Tomorrow is a holiday Haines & Gerber (1980: 211)
Who’s gonna shoe Lullaby Haines & Gerber (1980: 215)
B.1.16 Songs about themselves

A Song about me Pitts et al. (1949: 3)
Little teeth Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 15)
Who are you Pitts et al. (1949: 5)
Would you like to know Pitts et al. (1949: 4)
B.1.17 Singing while playing and performing specific actions

Clapping and stamping Pitts et al. (1949: 10)
Come along Pitts et al. (1949: 9)
Hop up, hop down Pitts et al. (1949: 21)
In a line Pitts et al. (1949: 27)
Marching to my drum Pitts et al. (1949: 25)
Marching Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 65)
My swing Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 58,59)
Play along Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 27)
Roll Pitts et al. (1949: 29)
Roll, Roll the ball Pitts et al. (1949: 29)
Round and round we’re skipping Pitts et al. (1949: 16)
Running Pitts et al. (1949: 10)
See me jump Pitts et al. (1949: 19)
See-saw Pitts et al. (1949: 30)
200
See-saw, Sacradown Pitts et al. (1949: 30)

Skipping is fun Pitts et al. (1949: 13)
Swinging Pitts et al. (1949: 31)
Tippy tiptoe Pitts et al. (1949: 20)
Tramp, tramp Pitts et al. (1949: 26)
Warm Hands Pitts et al. (1949: 3)
We’re galloping Pitts et al. (1949: 18)
Will you come and play? Pitts et al. (1949: 8)
Will you come Pitts et al. (1949: 23)
B.1.18 Songs about the home and daily routines

A cup of tea Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 48,49)
Drink your milk Pitts et al. (1949: 33)
Get up Pitts et al. (1949: 44)
Good morning Pitts et al. (1949: 44)
Hiding Pitts et al. (1949: 45)
I have a little sister Pitts et al. (1949: 46)
In the bath Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 55)
Now is the time to rest Pitts et al. (1949: 35)
Polly put the kettle on Pitts et al. (1949: 33)
Rock, rock, rock Pitts et al. (1949: 45)
Sharing sweets Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 52,53)
This is my sleepy time Pitts et al. (1949: 34)
B.1.19 Songs about babies

Clapping game Pitts et al. (1949: 49)
Dancing song Pitts et al. (1949: 48)
Finger song Pitts et al. (1949: 50)
Finger game Pitts et al. (1949: 51)
Knock at the door Pitts et al. (1949: 50)
Pat-a-cake Pitts et al. (1949: 49)
Pinky winky baby Pitts et al. (1949: 47)
201
This little pig Pitts et al. (1949: 50)

What are babies made of? Pitts et al. (1949: 47)
Where is Thumbkin? Pitts et al. (1949: 51)
B.1.20 Foot-Riding songs

Ride a cock horse Pitts et al. (1949: 52)
Ride-a, ride-a pony Pitts et al. (1949: 53)
To market, to market Pitts et al. (1949: 54)
B.1.21 Songs about bedtime

Bed time Pitts et al. (1949: 55)
Bye, baby bunting Pitts et al. (1949: 58)
Gid-dap! Pitts et al. (1949: 56)
Hippety hop to bed Pitts et al. (1949: 55)
I always want my teddy bear Pitts et al. (1949: 60)
My dream Pitts et al. (1949: 56)
Sleep, baby, sleep Pitts et al. (1949: 59)
Sleep, my birdies Pitts et al. (1949: 61)
To baby land Pitts et al. (1949: 58)
B.1.22 Prayer songs

My prayer Pitts et al. (1949: 62)
Prayer Pitts et al. (1949: 62)
We thank Thee, dear Lord Pitts et al. (1949: 62)
B.1.23 Songs about the sun, moon and stars

Take my hand Pitts et al. (1949: 95)
The happy stars Pitts et al. (1949: 95)
The stars Pitts et al. (1949: 96)
The man in the moon Pitts et al. (1949: 96)
The sun Pitts et al. (1949: 95)
202
B.1.24 Songs about seasons and the weather

A Bluebird sings Pitts et al. (1949: 105)
A bird in a pear tree Pitts et al. (1949: 105)
Buzzy, buzzy bee Pitts et al. (1949: 107)
Down, down Pitts et al. (1949: 100)
I’m glad it’s snowing Pitts et al. (1949: 101)
My pretty butterfly Pitts et al. (1949: 108)
Oh, isn’t it fun Pitts et al. (1949: 3)
Rain Pitts et al. (1949: 3)
Split, spat, spatter Pitts et al. (1949: 3)
The leaves Pitts et al. (1949: 99)
The snowman Pitts et al. (1949: 101)
The wind is singing Pitts et al. (1949: 99)
Under my umbrella Pitts et al. (1949: 3)
Without a sound at all Pitts et al. (1949: 102)
B.1.25 Pets and other animals

Animal calls Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 34,35)
Bear Pitts et al. (1949: 122)
Doggy and kitty Pitts et al. (1949: 110)
Elephant Pitts et al. (1949: 121)
Giraffe Pitts et al. (1949: 120)
Here comes our rabbit Pitts et al. (1949: 112)
Lion Pitts et al. (1949: 120)
Little dog, what do you say? Pitts et al. (1949: 113)
Monkey Pitts et al. (1949: 120)
My pony Bill Pitts et al. (1949: 111)
My kitty Pitts et al. (1949: 110)
Peter Rabbit Pitts et al. (1949: 111)
Piggy Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 23)
Puppy’s tail Pitts et al. (1949: 112)
Two little Kitty-cats Pitts et al. (1949: 112)
B.2 Afrikaans Songs
203
B.2.1 Afrikaans Folk songs

Aai, aai die witborskraai FAK Sangbundel (1979: 369)
Bobbejaan klim die berg Groot Sangboek (1994: 68)
Bokkie Groot Sangboek (1994: 35)
Daar kom die wa Groot Sangboek (1994: 79)
Die kat kom weer FAK Sangbundel (1979: 309,310)
Ek soek na my Dina FAK Sangbundel (1979: 223,224)
Ek soek na my Dina Groot Sangboek (1994: 32)
Hier’s ek weer FAK Sangbundel (1979: 225)
Hier’s ek weer Groot Sangboek (1994: 31)
Hoe ry die Boere FAK Sangbundel (1979: 303)
Hoe ry die Boere Groot Sangboek (1994: 78)
Jan Pierewiet Groot Sangboek (1994: 33)
Japie my skapie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 229-231)
My hartjie, my liefie Groot Sangboek (1994: 34)
Olle bolle (Traditional) Groot Sangboek (1994: 69)
Ou tante Koba Groot Sangboek (1994: 156)
Saai die waatlemoen Groot Sangboek (1994: 153)
So ry die trein FAK Sangbundel (1979: 301,302)
So ry die trein Groot Sangboek (1994: 82)
Suikerbossie Groot Sangboek (1994: 26)
Tant Hessie se witperd Groot Sangboek (1994: 80)
Trippe, trappe, trone Groot Sangboek (1994: 72)
Vat jou goed en trek Groot Sangboek (1994: 89)
Vat jou goed en trek FAK Sangbundel (1979: 357)
Wielie Walie Groot Sangboek (1994: 73)
B.2.2. Afrikaans Action Songs and games

Al die veld is vrolik FAK Sangbundel (1979: 80)
Alles het ‘n taak Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 29)
Arme jy Lamprecht (1954: 15)
Boetie-lief kom laat ons dans Groot Sangboek (1994: 146)
Daar dans ‘n biba-boetsiman FAK Sangbundel (1979: 456)
204
Dansliedjie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 437)

Die musikantjies - Little Musicians Hoexter (1934: 8,9)
Die toonleer Pienaar & Malan (1975b: 60)
Die trein Rudolph (1985: 196)
Die paddskool FAK Sangbundel (1979: 446)
Die wekker Kromhout (1972: 14)
Die gansies Kromhout (1972: 19)
Die Horlosie Rudolph (1985: 195)
Driewiel Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 8)
Ek was my Rudolph (1985: 233)
Ek sing en dans Rudolph (1985: 197)
Eseltjie ry Kromhout (1972: 12,13)
Eseltjie ry FAK Sangbundel (1979: 453)
Feëklokkies FAK Sangbundel (1979: 444)
Feëlied De Villiers (1934: 5)
Haidiedeldie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 440)
Hande op die sye Rudolph (1985: 191,192)
Handjies klap Hyman (1980: 4)
Hasie Kalbassie Dippenaar & Lochner ([s.a.]: 32)
Hasie in die Bossie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 459,460)
Hoedjies van papier FAK Sangbundel (1979: 438)
Hoe maak hul Pienaar & Malan (1975b: 15)
In ‘n ry Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 71)
Kabouterman FAK Sangbundel (1979: 456)
Kabouterman Northcote et al. (1984: 11)
Kennewippie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 435)
Ketting, ketting Hyman (1980: 12)
Kietsie se sproet Lamprecht (1954: 10)
Klokke en Diere FAK Sangbundel (1979: 441)
Kosie Kramer Kromhout (1970: 7)
Laat die voetjies Dippenaar & Lochner ([s.a.]: 23)
Lekker sing Rudolph (1985: 228)
Mars van die eende FAK Sangbundel (1979: 448)
205
My mense FAK Sangbundel (1979: 446)

My perdjie Lamprecht (1954: 11)
Ons orkes Rudolph (1985: 203)
Ons ry so lekker rond Rudolph (1985: 224)
Oom Olifant De Villiers (1934: 15)
Perdjie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 452)
Rondomtalie Lamprecht (1954: 7)
Rondomtalie De Waal & Luyt (1954: 10)
Rygoed Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 20)
Trein ry Hyman (1980: 1)
Sannie se lammetjie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 439)
Skoppelmaai Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 56,57)
Skoppelmaai Rudolph (1985: 222)
Soldaatjies Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 64)
Speel saam Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 26)
Spinnekop Dippenaar & Lochner ([s.a.]: 10,11)
Stapliedjie Pienaar & Malan (1975b: 43)
Stoute muisie Lamprecht (1954: 12)
Tamboer en Trompet Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 1)
Tiekiedraai Northcote et al. (1984: 1)
Tieng tang Northcote et al. (1984: 4)
Tuinwerk Pienaar & Malan (1975b: 51)
Varkie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 438)
Wielie walie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 434)
Zoem, zoem, zoem FAK Sangbundel (1979: 443)
B.2.3 Afrikaans Rhymes, chants, bouncing rhymes and rhythmic speech patterns
Klap, klap, klap! Opperman (1981: 15).
Handjies vou Opperman (1981: 15)
Aanraak liedjie Opperman (1981: 14)
Troetelrym (Alba Bouwer) Opperman (1981: 17)
Kniespel Opperman (1981: 20)
Knieliedjie Opperman (1981: 20).
206
Aandliedjie Kromhout (1970: 11)

Tongglippertjies De Villiers (1934: 18)
B.2.4 Afrikaans Finger-play Songs:

Duimpie Hyman (1980: 5)
Ou Duimelot Lamprecht ([s.a.]: 16)
B.2.5 Afrikaans Rhymes, chants and rhythmic speech patterns

Tongglippertjies De Villiers (1934: 18)
B.2.6 Afrikaans Counting and Counting-out songs

Ellietjie, kellietjie Opperman (1981: 116).
Yna dyna daina das Opperman (1981: 116).
Een, twee, drie, vier, vyf Kromhout (1970: 5).
Olke Bolke Rudolph (1985: 201,202)
Ons tel Rudolph (1985: 230)
Trippe trappe trone FAK Sangbundel (1979: 434)
Uittelrympie Hyman (1980: 3)
B.2.7 Afrikaans Singing games

Appels en lemoene - Oranges and apples Hoexter (1934: 10)
Boetie-lief, kom laat ons dans Groot Sangboek (1994: 146)
Dans, Kindjie, dans Groot Sangboek (1994: 161)
Die flukse wasvrou Stern ([s.a.]: 17)
Die musikantjies - Little Musicians Hoexter (1934: 8,9)
Die Paddatjie -The Froggies Hoexter (1934: 12)
Doringrosie Stern ([s.a.]: 7)
Doringrosie Groot Sangboek (1994: 148)
Hop, hop, hop Stern ([s.a.]: 11)
207
Ketting, ketting Hyman (1980: 12)

Liewe Boetie, kom tog nou Stern ([s.a.]: 15)
Marsjeerliedjie - Marching Song Hoexter (1934: 16,17)
Regterhand, linkerhand Stern ([s.a.]: 23)
Ringel, ringel, raai Groot Sangboek (1994: 160)
B.2.8. Afrikaans Songs in formation

‘n Speletjie Pienaar & Malan (1975b: 63)
Boetie-lief kom laat ons dans Groot Sangboek (1994: 146)
Dans, kindjie, dans. Groot Sangboek (1994:161)
Doringrosie Groot Sangboek (1994: 148)
Kom nou kinders Groot Sangboek (1994: 142)
Ringel, ringel, raai Groot Sangboek (1994: 160)
B.2.9 Example of Afrikaans three tone songs

B.2.10 Afrikaans Call and response songs

Grietjie Marietjie Groot Sangboek (1994: 73)
B.2.11 Afrikaans Songs for the young child

Daar dans ‘n biba-boetsiman FAK Sangbundel (1979: 456)
Die Gansies Hendrikse, et al. (1992: 66)
Die paddaskool FAK Sangbundel (1979: 446)
Die vlooi Hendrikse, et al. (1992: 18-20)
Drie gansies in die strooi Groot Sangboek (1994: 138)
Ek is ‘n boer Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 62)
Feëklokkies FAK Sangbundel (1979: 444)
208
Grietjie Marietjie Groot Sangboek (1994: 73)

Haidiedeldie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 440)
Hansie slim Groot Sangboek (1994: 57)
Hansie slim FAK Sangbundel (1979: 449)
Hasie in die donga, Hasie hop Groot Sangboek (1994: 71)
Hoedjies van papier FAK Sangbundel (1979: 438)
Kabouterman FAK Sangbundel (1979: 456)
Kippie -The little white hen Hoexter (1934: 6,7)
Klein Blinkoog FAK Sangbundel (1979: 448)
Kosie Kramer Kromhout (1970: 7)
Laat die voetjies Dippenaar & Lochner ([s.a.]: 23)
Liewe, liewe eendjies Groot Sangboek (1994: 118)
My Pappa, my Mamma Rudolph (1985: 220)
My mense FAK Sangbundel (1979: 446)
Olle Bolle FAK Sangbundel (1979: 435)
Ou Juffrou Padda en tien klein paddatjies Hendrikse et al. (1992: 24-26)
Ronde blikkie. FAK Sangbundel (1979: 436)
Rondomtalie De Waal & Luyt (1954: 10)
Sannie se lammetjie Groot Sangboek (1994: 70)
Wiet Verniet FAK Sangbundel (1979: 437)
Windjie waai so koud daarbuite Hendrikse et al. (1992: 58-60)
209
B.2.12 Afrikaans Occasional Afrikaans songs

Verjaarsdagliedjie Rudolph (1985: 215)
B.2.13 Afrikaans Songs about themselves

Babbelbek Rudolph (1985: 231)
Francina De Waal & Luyt (1954: 6)
Tandjies Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 14)

‘n Speletjie Pienaar & Malan (1975b: 63)
Driewiel Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 8)
Hoe maak hul Pienaar & Malan (1975b: 15)
In ‘n ry Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 71)
Knietjie ry Kromhout (1970: 13)
Rygoed Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 20)
Soldaatjies Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 31),
Tiekiedraai Northcote et al. (1984: 1)
Tamboer en Trompet Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 1)
210
B.2.15 Afrikaans Songs about the home and daily routines

Fiemies Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 50)
Kop tot toon Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 54)
Lekkertjies Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 50,51)
My Pappa, my Mamma Rudolph (1985: 220)
O, ek wonder Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 39)
Ons speel plaas Northcote et al. (1984: 7)
Teetyd Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 46,47)
Tuinwerk Pienaar & Malan (1975b: 51)
B.2.16 Afrikaans Songs about babies

Teleurgesteld Kromhout (1970: 23)
B.2.17 Afrikaans Foot-Riding songs

Knietjie ry Kromhout (1970: 13)
B.2.18 Afrikaans Songs about seasons and the weather

Reën Rudolph (1985: 229)
Windjie waai so koud daarbuite Hendrikse, et al. (1992: 58-60)
B.2.19. Pets and other animals

‘n Donkie Rudolph (1985: 193)
Apestreke Kromhout (1970: 19)
Apie Hyman (1980: 19)
Die Vissies Barry (1970: 5)
Die paddatjies -The froggies Hoexter (1934: 12)
Die paddskool FAK Sangbundel (1979: 446)
Die Blink Vosperd FAK Sangbundel (1979: 308,309)
Die Gansies Hendrikse, et al. (1992: 66)
211
Die gansies Kromhout (1972: 19)

Diertjies Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 32,33)
Drie gansies in die strooi Groot Sangboek (1994: 138)
Eiers Rudolph (1985: 226)
Eseltjie ry Kromhout (1972: 12,13)
Hasie in die donga, Hasie hop Groot Sangboek (1994: 71)
Hasie, hasie wipstert McLaclan (1980: 59)
Hasie Kalbassie Dippenaar & Lochner ([s.a.]: 32)
Hondjie Dippenaar & Lochner ([s.a.]: 9)
In die dieretuin Pienaar & Malan (1975a: 36)
Kiepie, Kiepie Kromhout (1970: 16)
Kietsie se sproet Lamprecht (1954: 10)
Krappies Dippenaar & Lochner [(s.a.]: 8)
Liewe, liewe eendjies Groot Sangboek (1994: 118)
Mars van die eende Barry (1970: 6)
My foksie Hendrikse, et al. (1992: 4)
My hondjie Rudolph (1985: 176)
My perdjie Lamprecht (1954: 11)
My perd Rudolph (1985: 177,178)
My Katjie Rudolph (1985: 223)
Oe-hoe. FAK Sangbundel (1979: 435)
Oom Olifant De Villiers (1934: 15)
Otjie Potgieter & Jordaan (1984: 22)
Ou Juffrou Padda en tien klein paddatjies Hendrikse, et al. (1992: 24-26)
Paddatjie Barry (1970: 7)
Piet-my-Vrou Northcote et al. (1984: 12)
212
Piete-Peuter, die Kanarie Kromhout (1970: 21)

Sannie se lammetjie Groot Sangboek (1994: 70)
Spinnekop Dippenaar & Lochner ([s.a.]: 10,11)
Stoute muisie Lamprecht (1954: 12)
Vissie Rudolph (1985: 229)
Vuisie Muisie Kromhout (1970: 15)
Woefie Kromhout (1972: 10)
B.2.20 Afrikaans songs for bedtime and lullabies

Afrikaanse Wiegeliedjie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 479)
Die maantjie hou wag De Villiers (1934: 13)
Doe-doe, my poppie De Waal & Luyt (1954: 12)
Feëklokkies De Villiers (1934: 7)
Fluit, fluit, my storie is uit De Waal & Luyt (1954: 14)
Kalie Kabouter Hendrikse, et al. (1992: 48-50)
Oe-hoe. FAK Sangbundel (1979: 435)
Pikaninie-Wiegelied FAK Sangbundel (1979: 466)
Slaap nou my prinsie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 482)
Slaap, Kindjie, slaap FAK Sangbundel (1979: 484)
Aandliedjie Kromhout (1970: 11) the last verse
Wiegeliedjie FAK Sangbundel (1979: 486)
Wiegliedjie Rudolph (1985: 120,121)
213
B.3 Xhosa Songs

B.3.1 Xhosa Action Songs and games
Amavil ebhasi (The wheels of the bus) Gunzburg (1987: 28)
As ons almal lekker saamwerk (Xa sonke sisebenza kunye kakuhle)
Grassroots (1990: 68-70)
Ihashe (The horse) Gunzburg (1987: 8)
Iintakana (The little birds) Gunzburg (1987: 5)
Impuku nekati (The cat and the mouse) Gunzburg (1987: 38,39)
Imvula Grassroots (1990: 18,19)
Imvula (The rain) Gunzburg (1987: 1)
Ingcongolo (The reed) Gunzburg (1987: 2)
Inja yam encinane (My little dog) Gunzburg (1987: 16)
Intloko namagxa… (Head, shoulders…) Gunzburg (1987: 11)
Koos die Groenteman (Nanku Koos ethengisa imifuno)
Grassroots (1990: 72,73)
Kusasa Sivuka (In the morning we wake up) Gunzburg (1987: 7)
Masiye esikolweni (Let's go to school) Gunzburg (1987: 29)
Nants' imfen emthini (Here is a baboon in the tree) Gunzburg (1987: 9)
Nkawu, nkawu uhleli emthini (Monkey, monkey in the tree)
Gunzburg (1987: 10)
Saai die waatlemoen (Hlwayel’ umxoxozi) Grassroots (1990: 74,75)
Sifikil’ Ezibukweni Grassroots (1990: 20)
Sifun’ iTshom’am Grassroots (1990: 29)
Sitwel' inkuni (We are carrying wood) Gunzburg (1987: 20)
Siyangqusha (We are stamping mealies) Gunzburg (1987: 24)
Thina sizigushana ezincinane (We are little lambs) Gunzburg (1987: 31)
Uloliwe (The train) Gunzburg (1987: 27)
Umlim' use 'stiyeni (The farmer in the dell) Gunzburg (1987: 40)
Umzi watsha (The homestead is burning) Gunzburg (1987: 41)
Umzi watsha Grassroots (1990: 17)
UNoli noli (Noli-the carpenter) Gunzburg (1987: 25)
Yiza ntakana (Come little bird) Gunzburg (1987: 15)
B.3.2 Xhosa Greeting songs
214
Molweni Grassroots (1990: 9)
B.3.3 Xhosa Singing games

B.3.4 Xhosa Songs in formation

B.3.5 Xhosa Call and response songs

Vulan’iRing Grassroots (1990: 12)
Uloliwe (The train) Gunzburg (1987: 27)
B.3.6 Xhosa Songs about themselves

Intloko namagxa (Head, shoulders…) Gunzburg (1987: 11)

Abhabhathane elincinane (The little butterfly) Gunzburg (1987: 6)
Sitwel' inkuni (We are carrying wood) Gunzburg (1987: 20)
Siyangqusha (We are stamping mealies) Gunzburg (1987: 24)
UNoli noli (Noli-the carpenter) Gunzburg (1987: 25)
B.3.8 Xhosa Songs about the home and daily routines

As ons almal lekker saamwerk (Xa sonke sisebenza kunye kakuhle)
Grassroots (1990: 68-70)
Koos die Groenteman (Nanku Koos ethengisa imifuno) Grassroots (1990: 72,73)
215

Masiye esikolweni (Let's go to school) Gunzburg (1987: 29)
Umama uyaphi (Where is mommy going?) Gunzburg (1987: 12)
B.3.9 Xhosa lullabies and songs about bedtime

Lala thula bhaba ( Lala, hush, my baby) Gunzburg (1987: 14)
Owa Umntwana Grassroots (1990: 30)
Thula thul' thula bhaba (Hush, hush, baby) Gunzburg (1987: 35)
B.3.10 Xhosa Prayer songs

Umthandazo Grassroots (1990: 48)
B.3.11 Xhosa Songs about seasons and the weather

Amasele (The frogs) Gunzburg (1987: 3)
Imvula (The rain) Gunzburg (1987: 1)
Umoya Grassroots (1990: 16)
B.3.12 Pets and other animals

Abhabhathane elincinane (The little butterfly) Gunzburg (1987: 6)
Amadad' amahle (The beautiful ducks) Gunzburg (1987: 4)
Amasele (The frogs) Gunzburg (1987: 3)
Ihashe (The horse) Gunzburg (1987: 8)
Inja yam encinane (My little dog) Gunzburg (1987: 16)
Nants' imfen emthini (Here is a baboon in the tree) Gunzburg (1987: 9)
Nkawu, nkawu uhleli emthini (Monkey, monkey in the tree) Gunzburg (1987: 10)
Sifikil’ Ezibukweni Grassroots (1990: 20)
Sizinyoni Thina Grassroots (1990: 21)
216
Yiza ntakana (Come little bird) Gunzburg (1987: 15)

Koch-Lochner Music 2007

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Koch-Lochner Music 2007

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Koch-Lochner Music 2007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

i

Music for Early Childhood: Guidelines for

ALETTA MARIA KOCH-LOCHNER

Thesis presented in partial fulfilment of the requirements for the degree of

Signature: ................................ Date: ..............................

CHAPTER 2: The Importance of Music Education for Children

CHAPTER 3: When to start music education with the child 30

CHAPTER 4: Guidelines and information to help parents to make a positive

CHAPTER 5: Music education and music experience in early childhood: basic

5.2 Conclusion 158

CHAPTER 6: Summary of research 160

1.1 Problem statement

• Currently, music stimulation programmes such as Kindermusik and PRACTICA are

1.2 Aim of the study

The research objectives comprised:

The practical objectives were:

The research methodology used was:

1.3 Organisation of the study

Chapter 6 provides a brief summary of the research that was undertaken.

The research report is concluded with the Bibliography.

CHAPTER 2: THE IMPORTANCE OF MUSIC EDUCATION FOR CHILDREN

2.1 Music for the sake of music as primary goal

We do not teach music because we expect you to major in music or become a

2.2 Music is part of the human world

2.3 Music is part of human heritage

2.4 The biological foundations of music

2 Blacking, J. 1973. How musical is man? London: Faber & Faber

A relatively new type of scientific research is currently done by neuroscientists. Researchers

2.5 Music can contribute to the cognitive development of the child

In an experiment done by Frances Rauscher at the University of California in 1994, it was

During October 1995, researchers at the University of Konstanz, Germany, conducted

In 1994, at Rhode Island, a sequential, skill-building music programme was presented to

2.6 Music can contribute to the physical development of the child

• Gross motor control skills: Children can be encouraged to perform rhythmical

• Eye-hand co-ordination skills: Children can improve this by handling instruments or by

2.7 Music can contribute to the emotional development of the child

2.8 Music can contribute to the social development of the child

Since music has so much to do with the molding of character, it is necessary

In music education, educators acknowledge the young child as a “child-in-totality”. Although

• Group participation and socially appropriate behaviours: By participating and

It is essential that children learn to communicate in order to establish social contact.

• Awareness of cultural and national identity: As children continue to participate in social

2.9 Musical Intelligence: One of the intelligences according to Howard Gardner’s

I am convinced that all of us have a biological guarantee of musicianship. This is

Musical Intelligence is described as the ability or capacity of an individual to perceive,

Appreciation of music is also considered as one of the main characteristics of musical

• They enjoy and are able to play musical instruments;

According to Armstrong, it is never too late to develop an individual’s musical intelligence.

• Sing spontaneously in the shower or while travelling;

• Volunteer to sing and perform music at hospitals, day-care centres or retirement

2.10 Music can be of therapeutic value to the child

The Canadian Association for Music Therapy defines music therapy as

...the skillful use of music and musical elements by an accredited music

2.10.1 The Therapeutic characteristics of Music

Music exhibits the following therapeutic characteristics:

2.10.2 The long-term goals of music therapy

• to improve children’s self-image and consciousness of their bodies;

2.10.3 Activities used in music therapy